• Share
  • Email
  • Embed
  • Like
  • Save
  • Private Content
2012 dodge challenger owners manual provided by naples dodge
 

2012 dodge challenger owners manual provided by naples dodge

on

  • 1,623 views

Provided by Naples Dodge, 2012 Dodge Challenger Coupe Owners manual. Naples Dodge is a Naples Fort Myers area used, new, and preowned car dealership. Our address is 6381 Airport Rd. N. Naples FL, ...

Provided by Naples Dodge, 2012 Dodge Challenger Coupe Owners manual. Naples Dodge is a Naples Fort Myers area used, new, and preowned car dealership. Our address is 6381 Airport Rd. N. Naples FL, 34109.. Telephone (239)594-2100. Visit our website at naples dodge.com or see our sister dealership naplesmazda.com.

Statistics

Views

Total Views
1,623
Views on SlideShare
1,589
Embed Views
34

Actions

Likes
0
Downloads
3
Comments
0

2 Embeds 34

http://www.naplesdodgechrysler.com 24
http://naplesdodgechryslercllc.composer.dealer.com 10

Accessibility

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

    2012 dodge challenger owners manual provided by naples dodge 2012 dodge challenger owners manual provided by naples dodge Presentation Transcript

    • 2012 Challenger 2012 OWNER’S MANUAL Challenger Chrysler Group LLC 12D491-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.905554_Challenger_OM cover.indd 1 3/15/11 12:35 PM
    • VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADAWith respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name This manual illustrates and describes the operation ofChrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the features and equipment that are either standard or optionalname Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available orDRIVING AND ALCOHOL were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard anyDrunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of features and equipment described in this manual that areaccidents. not on this vehicle.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with bloodalcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes indrinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking design and specifications, and/or make additions to ordriver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. improvements to its products without imposing any obliga- tion upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC drinking. Never drink and then drive.
    • SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 910 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 10
    • INTRODUCTION 1CONTENTSⅥ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6Ⅵ How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ⅵ Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Ⅵ Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
    • 4 INTRODUCTIONINTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorizedCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision nicians and genuine MOPAR௡ parts, and cares aboutworkmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all your satisfaction.essentials that are traditional to our vehicles. HOW TO USE THIS MANUALThis Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which sectiontance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various Since the specification of your vehicle depends on thecustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time to items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions andread these publications carefully. Following the instruc- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.tions and recommendations in this manual will help The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manualassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. contains a complete listing of all subjects.NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of theshould be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughouting and remain with the vehicle when sold. this Owner’s Manual:
    • INTRODUCTION 5 1
    • 6 INTRODUCTIONWARNINGS AND CAUTIONSThis Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-erating procedures that could result in a collision orbodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If youdo not read this entire manual, you may miss importantinformation. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERThe Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the leftfront corner of the instrument panel and is visible fromoutside of the vehicle through the windshield. Thisnumber also appears on the Automobile Information VIN LocationDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also locatedvehicle registration, and the title. on the right front strut tower inside the engine compart- ment.
    • INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! 1 Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLECONTENTS 2Ⅵ A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Ⅵ Vehicle Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . . 14 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Ⅵ Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Ⅵ Sentry Key௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Ⅵ Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 ▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 ▫ To Open The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
    • 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Ⅵ Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 26 Ⅵ Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 26 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Ⅵ Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Ⅵ Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 27 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 ▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 51Ⅵ Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 52 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 ▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Ⅵ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 ▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Ⅵ Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 ▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System ▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 (BeltAlert௡) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 55
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 ▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Ⅵ Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 2 ▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 62 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The ▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Ⅵ Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 79
    • 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEA WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system N-Go, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) will display the ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with RUN). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Centerintegral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instru-the ignition switch with either side up. ment Panel” for further information.Keyless Enter-N-Go FeatureThis vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Gofeature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting AndOperating” for further information.Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to anignition switch. It has four operating positions, three withdetents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START positionis a spring-loaded momentary contact position. Whenreleased from the START position, the switch automati-cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi- 2 tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead. The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet park- ing.1 — OFF2 — ACCESSORY (ACCESSORY) NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with3 — ON/RUN4 — START the theft alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is dead) into the ignition switch to disarm theft alarm.
    • 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignitionat the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to thethen pull the key out with your other hand. OFF position and then remove the Key Fob. With the Keyless Enter-N-Go system, the EVIC will display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out- lets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Emergency Key Removal Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-into the lock cylinders with either side up. strument Panel” for further information.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued)• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Key Fob will become locked in the ignition. access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is 2• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or or ignition module. Only remove the emergency others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- key for locking and unlocking the doors. dren should be warned not to touch the parking• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either: brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Jump Start the vehicle. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or • Charge the battery. ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win- dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking cause serious injury or death. brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re- move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. (Continued)
    • 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE will cause the reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Start- CAUTION! ing Procedures” in “Starting And Operating” for further An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always information. remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition OFF with Keyless Enter-N-Go, and lock all doors SENTRY KEYா when leaving the vehicle unattended. The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer System prevents unauthor- ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. TheKey-In-Ignition Reminder system does not need to be armed or activated. OperationOpening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is lockedignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, or unlocked.sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob. The system uses a Key Fob with factory-mated RemoteNOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignitionwhen the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.position. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. TheIf your vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, system will shut the engine off in two seconds if anopening the driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.switch is placed in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the Replacement Keysbulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to theelectronics. This condition will result in the engine being vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate theshut off after two seconds. 2 vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, itIf the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. CAUTION!Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as • Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle andpossible by an authorized dealer. lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- CAUTION! tended. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, The Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer system is not compat- always remember to place the ignition in OFF. ible with some after-market remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided problems and loss of security protection. with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number isAll of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
    • 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEDuplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- • This device must accept any interference that may berized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a received, including interference that may cause unde-blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob sired operation.is one that has never been programmed. VEHICLE SECURITY ALARMNOTE: When having the Sentry Key௡ Immobilizer The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doorsSystem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switchthe authorized dealer. for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle SecurityCustomer Key Programming Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks andProgramming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be decklid release are disabled. If something triggers theperformed at an authorized dealer. alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the fol- lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,General Information the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turnThe Sentry Key௡ system complies with FCC rules Part 15 signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in theand with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is instrument cluster will flash.subject to the following conditions: Rearming Of The System• This device may not cause harmful interference. If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off • Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switchafter an additional 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle with the driver and/or passenger door open.Security Alarm will rearm itself. • Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive EntryTo Arm The System Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same 2Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm: exterior zone (refer to ЉKeyless Enter-N-GoЉ in ЉThings To Know Before Starting Your VehicleЉ for further informa-1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to tion).ЉStarting ProceduresЉ in ЉStarting And OperatingЉ forfurther information). • Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, makesure the vehicle ignition system is ЉOFFЉ. 3. If any doors are open, close them.• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, To Disarm The Systemmake sure the vehicle ignition system is ЉOFFЉ and the The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any ofkey is physically removed from the ignition. the following methods:2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keylessvehicle: Entry (RKE) transmitter.
    • 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters the equipped, refer to ЉKeyless Enter-N-GoЉ in ЉThings To vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the Know Before Starting Your VehicleЉ for further infor- alarm will sound. mation). • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, press power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (requires at • The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle). vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, system will give you a false alarm. If one of the insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the previously described arming sequences has occurred, key to the ON position. the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain inNOTE: The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. Ifbutton on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.Vehicle Security Alarm. • If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will trunk entry. Pressing the trunk button will not disarm remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21Tamper Alert NOTE:If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in • The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-your absence, the horn will sound three times and the tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in theexterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the ЉDome ONЉ position (extreme top position). 2Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering. • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if theILLUMINATED ENTRY dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” positionThe courtesy lights will turn on when you use the (extreme bottom position).Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)doors or open any door. The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter doesther information. not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 secondsor they will immediately fade to off once the ignition NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter intoswitch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position. the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
    • 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEat speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system To Unlock The Doorsfrom responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKERKE transmitters. transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice within five seconds, to unlock both doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or both doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. Refer to “Elec- tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Set- Key Fob With RKE Transmitter tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under- standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23• When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps: Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to 210 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personalwhile still holding the LOCK button. Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-2. Release both buttons at the same time. standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- • When not using the EVIC, perform the followinging the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter steps:with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key 1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmedFob removed. RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button whileits previous setting. still holding the UNLOCK button.NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- 2. Release both buttons at the same time.ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate theSecurity Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarmactivated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UN-LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm.
    • 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- To Lock The Doorsing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the Key ter to lock both doors. The turn signal lights will flashFob removed. and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry),its previous setting. refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Sound Horn With Remote Key LockAlarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doorswill cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entryto deactivate the Security Alarm. feature. This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” inThis feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. formation.The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/PersonalSettings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25• When not using the EVIC, perform the following steps: To Open The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans- times within five seconds to open the trunk.mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry), 2the LOCK button. refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.2. Release both buttons at the same time. Using The Panic Alarm3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press- To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press anding the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for atignition switch in the OFF position and the Key Fob least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,removed. the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights willits previous setting. turn on.NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unlesster while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button aAlarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mphwill cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button (24 km/h) or greater.to deactivate the Security Alarm.
    • 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: 1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the and horn will remain on. elastomer seal during removal.• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 2. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. by the system. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch aProgramming Additional Transmitters battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may beperformed at an authorized dealer. 3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves of the case together. Make sure there is an evenTransmitter Battery Replacement “gap” between the two halves. If equipped, install andThe recommended replacement battery is CR2032. tighten the screw until snug. Test RKE transmitterNOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may operation.apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27General Information 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio stationThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to thefollowing conditions: REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry 2• This device may not cause harmful interference. (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-• This device must accept any interference received, niently from outside the vehicle while still including interference that may cause undesired maintaining security. The system has a range of operation. approximately 300 ft (91 m).NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap- NOTE:proved by the party responsible for compliance could • The vehicle must be equipped with an automaticvoid the user’s authority to operate the equipment. transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fobdistance, check for these two conditions: may reduce this range.1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of How To Use Remote Startthe battery is a minimum of three years. All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: • Shift lever in PARK
    • 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Doors closed WARNING!• Hood closed • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or• Hazard switch off confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon- oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed) bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious• Ignition key removed from ignition switch injury or death when inhaled.• Battery at an acceptable charge level, and • Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters away from children. Operation of the Remote Start• RKE PANIC button not pressed. System, windows, door locks or other controls• System not disabled from previous remote start event could cause serious injury or death.• Vehicle theft alarm not active To Enter Remote Start Mode• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go) Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec- onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will flash and horn will chirp twice (if
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving Thewill remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute Vehiclecycle. • Press and release the REMOTE START button one timeNOTE: or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute 2• If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and cycle. then shut down 10 seconds later. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START Remote Start mode. button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.• For security, power window and power sunroof op- eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle in the Remote Start mode. Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the• The engine can be started two consecutive times with doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or press and release the START/STOP button. If the the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the third cycle. ON/RUN position.
    • 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLENOTE: • Low Fuel Light turns on• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter- • The hood is opened N-Go feature, the ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle. • The hazard switch is pressed• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter- • The shift lever is moved out of PARK N-Go feature, the message “Insert Key/Turn To On” will display in the EVIC until you insert the Key Fob. DOOR LOCKS Once inserted, the message “Turn To On” will display Manual Door Locks in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to ON/RUN. To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will lock knob on each door trim panel upward. display in the EVIC until you push the START button.Cancel Remote StartRemote Starting will also cancel if any of the followingoccur:• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm• Any engine warning lights come on
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING! • For personal security and safety in the event of an accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as 2 well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Un- supervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries or death. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is Door Lock Knob dangerous for a number of reasons. A child orIf the door lock knob is down when you shut the door, others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is dren should be warned not to touch the parkingnot inside the vehicle before closing the door. brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued)
    • 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.Power Door LocksThe power door lock switch is located on each door trimpanel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors. Power Door Lock Switch The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. For further information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”. If you press the power door lock switch while the Key Fob is in the ignition, and either door is open, the power
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden- 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speedtally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARKoperate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition, 2and the ignition is in the OFF or ACC position, a chime 4. The driver door is openedwill sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob. 5. The doors were not previously unlockedAutomatic Door Locks — If Equipped 6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)When enabled, the door locks will lock automaticallywhen the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programmingauto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can beauthorized dealer per written request of the customer. enabled or disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-Please see your authorized dealer for service. mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit strument Panel” for further information.The doors will unlock automatically if: • When not using the EVIC, perform the following1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- steps:abled 1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
    • 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE2. Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch. KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the3. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and aOFF and ON/RUN and then back to OFF four times feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you toending up in the LOCK position. However, do not start lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having tothe engine. press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.4. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK NOTE:switch to unlock the doors. • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to5. A single chime will indicate the completion of the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/programming. Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea- tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” forNOTE: If you do not hear the chime, it means that the further information.system did not enter the programming mode and youwill need to repeat the procedure. • If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for 72 hours, the Passive Entry feature for the handle may6. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to time out. Pulling the deactivated front door handleits previous setting. will reactivate the door handle’s Passive Entry feature.NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit featurein accordance with local laws.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re- sponse time. 2• If you unlock the doors using the Passive Entry door handles, but do NOT pull the handle, the doors will automatically lock after 60 seconds.To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driverdoor handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handledoor is unlocked. NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
    • 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESettings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under- Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic doorstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob present in the ignition.To Unlock From The Passenger Side:With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doorspassenger door handle to unlock both doors automati- have been closed the vehicle checks the inside andcally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKEthe door is unlocked. transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no otherNOTE: Both doors will unlock when the front passenger valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automaticallyunlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three timesPress” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the PassivePreventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).Transmitter In VehicleTo minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking aPassive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37To Enter The Trunk NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s PassiveWith a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the(1.0 m) of the deck lid, press the button located on the deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unlesscenter of the light bar which is located on the deck lid another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit- 2above the license plate. ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the deck lid. Trunk Passive Entry Button
    • 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETo Lock The Vehicle’s Doors NOTE:With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters • After pressing the door handle LOCK button, youwithin 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlockhandles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock both the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. Thisdoors. is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE transmitter battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver’s door control both of Outside Door Handle Lock Button the door windows.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE: • The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 60 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when 2 either front door is opened. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa- tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- strument Panel” for further information. • The door window will lower slightly if it is closed completely when opening the door. The window will Power Window Switches return to its fully closed position after closing the door. This action allows the door to open without resistanceThere is a single window control on the passenger’s door and prevents window and seal damage.trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’sdoor. The window controls will operate only when theignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
    • 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The power window switches will remain active for up to WARNING! 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended this feature is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle children, can become entrapped by the windows Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- while operating the power window switches. Such Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In- entrapment may result in serious injury or death. strument Panel” for further information. Wind BuffetingAUTO-Down Feature Wind buffeting can be described as the perception ofThe driver’s door power window switch and passenger pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in thedoor power window switch have an AUTO-down fea- ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with theture. Press the window switch to the second detent, windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certainrelease, and the window will go down automatically. open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-To open the window part way, press the window switch rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs withto the first detent and release it when you want the one window open, then open the other window towindow to stop. minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the sunroof opening to mini-To stop the window from going all the way down during mize the buffeting.the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE feature will function only when the vehicle is in theThe trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by unlock condition.pressing the Trunk Release button. The button is located With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, theon the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. 2 Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument clusterNOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer displaybutton will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis- will reappear once the trunk is closed.sion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h) With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the keybefore the button will operate. removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym- The trunk lid can be released from bol will display until the trunk is closed. outside the vehicle by pressing the Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Trunk Release button on the Re- Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on mote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans- trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature. mitter twice within five seconds or by using the external release switch located on the underside of the decklid overhang. The release Trunk Release Button
    • 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLETRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING! Do not allow children to have access to the trunk, either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in the trunk, young children may not be able to escape, even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or heat stroke. Emergency ReleaseTrunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTSAs a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release Some of the most important safety features in yourlever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the vehicle are the restraint systems:event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, thetrunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in- • Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver andthe-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha- all passengersnism.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen- all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the ger desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) for the driver and passengers seated next to a Please pay close attention to the information in this 2 window section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) for possible. the driver and front outboard passenger If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether wheel for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants infant and child restraint systems. For more information on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may CHildren (LATCH). enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include rates of inflation based on several factors, including the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the severity and type of collision. seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
    • 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEHere are some simple steps you can take to minimize the ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allowrisk of harm from a deploying air bag: children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.1. Children 12 years old and under should always ridebuckled up in a rear seat. If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat WARNING! as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger You should read the instructions provided with your Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi- 2. All occupants should always wear their lap and tion. shoulder belts properly.Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 3. The driver and front passenger seats should bebelt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advancedsecured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt- Front Air Bags room to inflate.positioning booster seats. Older children who do not usechild restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 454. Do not lean against the door or window. If your WARNING! (Continued)vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, theside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrumentbetween you and the door. panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air 25. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortablymodified to accommodate a disabled person, contact extending your arms to reach the steering wheel orthe Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided instrument panel.under ؆If You Need Assistance؆. • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) WARNING! also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more door or window. Sit upright in the center of the severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work seat. with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. much greater injuries if you are not properly Always wear your seat belts even though you have buckled up. You can strike the interior of your air bags. vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others (Continued) in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
    • 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEBuckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even Lap/Shoulder Beltson short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped withand cause a collision that includes you. This can happen lap/shoulder belts.far away from home or on your own street. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock duringResearch has shown that seat belts save lives, and they very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows thecan reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you underof the worst injuries happen when people are thrown normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt willfrom the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of theejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the vehicle or being thrown out.inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle shouldbe belted at all times. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. (Continued)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat your injuries in a collision much worse. You might belts. suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out 2• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to using a seat belt properly. wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat sengers safe, too. belts are designed to go around the large bones of • Two people should never be belted into a single your body. These are the strongest parts of your seat belt. People belted together can crash into one body and can take the forces of a collision best. another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more (Continued) than one person, no matter what their size. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the front seat.
    • 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE2. The seat belt latch plate is contacting the seat when the 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latchbelt is routed through the seat web guide. When the belt plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”is routed outside of the seat web guide, the latch platewill contact the quarter trim panel. Grasp the latch plateand pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbingas far as necessary to make the belt go around your lap. Latch Plate To Buckle Latch Plate
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will • A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. not protect you properly. The lap portion could Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck 2 ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause buckle nearest you. internal injuries. Ribs are not as strong as shoulder• A belt that is too loose will not protect you bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far your strongest bones will take the force in a forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear collision. your seat belt snug. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more (Continued) likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. 4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
    • 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEtight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug 5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it isbelt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractorcollision. will withdraw any slack in the belt. WARNING! • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted belt cannot do its job as well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. Removing Slack From Belt
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 516. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ProcedureThe belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to shoulder belt.allow the belt to retract fully. 2 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. WARNING! 2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they latch plate. have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the etc.). folded webbing.
    • 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESeat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortablyThe seat belts in the passenger seating positions are wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to notequipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear awhich are used to secure a child restraint system. For ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbingadditional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- to retract completely in this case and then carefully pullstraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide thefeature for each seating position. latch plate into the buckle until you hear a Љclick.Љ Driver Center Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If First Row N/A N/A ALR Equipped Second Row ALR ALR ALR In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre- Third Row N/A N/A N/A locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail-• N/A — Not Applicable able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina-• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor tion lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seatingIf the passenger seating position is equipped with an position that has a belt with this feature. ChildrenALR and is being used for normal usage: 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode WARNING!1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re- 2the entire belt is extracted. tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func- tion is not working properly when checked ac-3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt isnow in the Automatic Locking Mode. • Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.How To Disengage The Automatic Locking ModeUnbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it Energy Management Featureto retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking This vehicle has a safety belt system with an EnergyMode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) Management feature in the front seating positions to helplocking mode. further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
    • 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESeat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder SystemThe seat belts for both front seating positions are (BeltAlertா)equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to BeltAlert௡ is a feature intended to remind the driver andremove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. front passenger (if equipped with front passengerThese devices may improve the performance of the seat BeltAlert௡) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is activebelt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seatearly in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light willpants, including those in child restraints. turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are fastened.NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seatbelt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be The BeltAlert௡ warning sequence begins after the vehicleworn snugly and positioned properly. speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entirestraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Remindera deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu- pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women(8 km/h), BeltAlert௡ will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat beltsnotification. throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. 2The front passenger seat BeltAlert௡ is not active when thefront passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert௡ may be Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belttriggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across theequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will takethe rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is a collision.secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. Seat Belt ExtenderBeltAlert௡ can be enabled or disabled by your authorized If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended yourdealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac- authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belttivating BeltAlert௡. extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required,NOTE: Although BeltAlert௡ has been deactivated, the remove the extender and store it.Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminatewhile the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped withBeltAlert௡) seat belt remains unfastened.
    • 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi- tion. Remove and store the extender when not needed.Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air BagsThis vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both thedriver and front passenger as a supplement to the seatbelt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster LocationsBag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bagspassenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 2 — Knee Bolsterinstrument panel, above the glove compartment. The NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Frontwords SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bagdesign. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,inflation based on several factors, including the severity and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABICand type of collision. air bags are located above the side windows and their 2 covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or frontpassenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the NOTE:inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,seat position. but they will open during air bag deployment.This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front • After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to anpassenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether authorized dealer immediately.the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The Air Bag System Componentsseat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bagAdvanced Front Air Bags. system components:This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat- • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhancedprotection for an occupant during a side impact. The • Air Bag Warning LightSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in • Steering Wheel and Columnthe outboard side of the front seats.
    • 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Instrument Panel determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact• Knee Impact Bolster sensors.• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) used for more severe collisions.• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) WARNING!• Front and Side Impact Sensors • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel, because any such• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a and Seat Track Position Sensors collision severe enough to cause the air bag toAdvanced Front Air Bag Features inflate.The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage (Continued)driver and front passenger air bags. This system providesoutput appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured 2 because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label etc. When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bagSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the leftSupplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right airprovide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant bag only.during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air baglabel sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
    • 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLESupplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC)SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to frontand rear seat outboard occupants in addition to thatprovided by the body structure. Each air bag featuresinflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of eachoutboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward,covering both windows on the impact side. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) NOTE: • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. • Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61The system includes side impact sensors that are cali- WARNING! (Continued)brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts thatrequire air bag occupant protection. • If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do not have any accessory items installed which will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to 2 WARNING! your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require • If your vehicle is equipped with left and right permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal- Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof (SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up of the vehicle for any reason. high enough to block the location of the SABIC. The area where the SABIC is located should re- Knee Impact Bolsters main free from any obstructions. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects driver and the front passenger, and position front occu- between you and the side air bags; the perfor- pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front mance could be adversely affected and/or objects Air Bags. could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. (Continued)
    • 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAlong with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front certain frontal collisions depending on the severity andAir Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im- type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are notproved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, orair bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant rollover collisions.protection. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in allAir Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub- stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. OnThe ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system the other hand, depending on the type and location ofrequired for this vehicle. impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashesThe ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce aside air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. severe initial deceleration.Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity andbags, SAB air bags, and front seat belt pretensioners, as type of collision.required, depending on the severity and type of impact.Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warningover time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are Light in the instrument panel for approxi-not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should mately four to eight seconds for a self-checkhave deployed. when the ignition is first turned on. After the 2 self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If theSeat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli- ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, itsions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarilyaway from an inflating air bag. or continuously. A single chime will sound if the lightThe ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction isposition, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. tics also record the nature of the malfunction.The ORC contains a backup power supply system thatmay deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power orit becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
    • 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The WARNING! steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the front passenger. air bag system immediately. The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the airDriver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.Inflator UnitsThe Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering Inflator Unitswheel and on the right side of the instrument panel. The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de-When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad- signed to activate only in certain side collisions.vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large The ORC determines if a side collision requires the sidequantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the air bags to inflate, based on several factors, including theAdvanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates severity and type of collision.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65Based on several factors, including the severity and type A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the sideof collision, the side air bag inflator on the crash side of curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushesthe vehicle may be triggered, releasing a quantity of the outside edge of the headliner out of the way andnon-toxic gas. The inflating SAB exits through the seat covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30 2seam into the space between the occupant and the door. milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takesThe SAB fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if youair bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high are not belted and seated properly, or if items areforce that it could injure you if you are not seated positioned in the area where the side curtain air bagproperly, or if items are positioned in the area where the inflates. This especially applies to children. The sideside air bag inflates. This especially applies to children. curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain(SABIC) Inflator Units Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,During collisions where the impact is confined to a vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators ofparticular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may whether or not an air bag should have deployed.deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity Front And Side Impact Sensorsand type of collision. In these events, the ORC will In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid thedeploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle. ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events.
    • 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEEnhanced Accident Response System If A Deployment OccursIn the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflatethe communication network remains intact, and the immediately after deployment.power remains intact, depending on the nature of the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in allevent the ORC will determine whether to have the collisions. This does not mean something is wrong withEnhanced Accident Response System perform the follow- the air bag system.ing functions: If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any• Cut off fuel to the engine. or all of the following may occur:• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or • The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause until the ignition key is turned off. abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The the battery has power or until the ignition key is abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those removed. you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.• Unlock the doors automatically. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System However, if you haven’t healed significantly within afunctions after an event, the ignition switch must be few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctorchanged from IGN ON to IGN OFF. immediately.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like WARNING! particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, 2 skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac- irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im- throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con- continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on troller (ORC) system serviced as well. your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in- structions for cleaning.Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
    • 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEMaintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or• Modifications to any part of the air bag system may not function properly if modifications are could cause it to fail when you need it. You could made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer be injured if the air bag system is not there to for any air bag system service. If your seat includ- protect you. Do not modify the components or ing your trim cover and cushion needs to be wiring, including adding any kind of badges or serviced in any way (including removal or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, manufacturer approved seat accessories may be or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air for persons with disabilities, contact your autho- bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who rized dealer. works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued)
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69Air Bag Warning Light NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine You will want to have the air bags ready to related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint inflate for your protection in a collision. The Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label 2 circuits and interconnecting wiring associatedwith air bag system electrical components. While the air located on the inside of the fuse block cover for thebag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if thethe following occurs, have an authorized dealer service fuse is good.the air bag system immediately. Event Data Recorder (EDR)• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in first turned to the ON/RUN position. certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per- eight-second interval. formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of remains on while driving. time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
    • 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is were buckled/fastened; required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the such as law enforcement, that have the special equip- accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, ment, can read the information if they have access to the• How fast the vehicle was traveling. vehicle or the EDR.These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraintsthe circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time, including babies and children. Every state in theNOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a United States and all Canadian provinces require thatnon-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is thethe EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properlyforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crashpersonally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained incrash investigation. the rear seats rather than in the front.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Infants And Child Restraints WARNING! Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward- In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear 2 required to hold even an infant on your lap could facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can become so great that you could not hold the child, no be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible matter how strong you are. The child and others child seats. could be badly injured. Any child riding in your The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until size. they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-There are different sizes and types of restraints for facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible childchildren from newborn size to the child almost large seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can beseat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat used rearward-facing by children who have outgrownfor your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your their infant carrier but are still less than at least two yearschild. old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
    • 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEheld in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the as long as possible, up to the highest weight or heightLATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also heldAnchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower An- WARNING! chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”. Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in All children whose weight or height is above the the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a bag. An air bag deployment could cause severe belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts injury or death to infants in this position. fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is againstOlder Children And Child Restraints the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning boosterChildren who are two years old or who have outgrown seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are heldtheir rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward- in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and Children Too Large For Booster Seatsconvertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belttion are for children who are over two years old or who comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bendhave outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of over the front of the seat when their back is against thetheir rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat. WARNING!• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug • Improper installation can lead to failure of an as possible. infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a 2• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or collision. The child could be badly injured or slouching can move the belt out of position. killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex- actly when installing an infant or child restraint.• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a • A rearward-facing child restraint should only be child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re- their back. straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy- ing passenger air bag, which may cause severe orNOTE: For additional information, refer to fatal injury to the infant.www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web- Here are some tips on getting the most out of your childsite for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/ restraint:roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm • Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
    • 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE you make sure that you can install the child restraint in Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH) the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it. Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s system provides for the installation of the child restraint weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing weight and height limits. the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may structure. not work when you need it. LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail-• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be restraint manufacturer’s directions. introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to WARNING! have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in connection to the top tether anchorages have been avail- the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the able for some time. For some older child restraints, many vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of allthe available attachments provided with your child re-straint in any vehicle.All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages 2that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatiblechild seats. You should never install LATCH-compatiblechild seats so that two seats share a common loweranchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are notLATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-cle’s seat belts. LATCH Anchorages Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
    • 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEAgain, carefully follow the installation instructions that means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward-are provided with the child restraint system. facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a located at the rear of the seat cushion where it means of adjusting the tension of the strap. meets the seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lowerrestraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easilyalong the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.surfaces. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material. Then, rotate the tether anchor- In addition, there are tether strap anchorages age cover directly behind the seat where you are placing behind each rear seating position located in the the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the panel between the rear seatback and the rear anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to window. These tether strap anchorages are provide the most direct path between the anchor and theunder a plastic cover with this symbol on it. child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as youMany, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with push the child restraint rearward and downward into theseparate straps on each side, with each having a hook or seat, removing slack in the straps according to the childconnector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77NOTE: WARNING!• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in Improper installation of a child restraint to the the strap. LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or 2 child restraint. The child could be badly injured or• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not when installing an infant or child restraint. being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the Belt seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave your child unattended in the vehicle.
    • 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEthen allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For To attach a child restraint tether strap:additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic 1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind theLocking Mode”. seat where you are placing the child restraint. Driver Center Passenger CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock First Row N/A N/A ALR Second Row ALR ALR ALR• N/A — Not Applicable• ALR — Automatic Locking RetractorTo install a child restraint, first, pull enough of the seatbelt webbing from the retractor to route it through thebelt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plateinto the buckle. Next, extract all the seat belt webbing outof the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into theretractor. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten Tether Strap Mountingthe lap portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt 1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hooksystem will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion- 3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchorally, and pull it tight if necessary.
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 792. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path Transporting Petsfor the strap between the anchor and the child seat. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in 2the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap a collision.according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into theopening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONSthe strap. A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new WARNING! vehicle. An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to Drive moderately during the first 500 miles (800 km). increased head motion and possible injury to the After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.
    • 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEWhile cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the should be considered a normal part of the break-in andlimits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear canbe detrimental and should be avoided. SAFETY TIPSThe engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant Transporting Passengersinstalled at the factory is high-quality and energy- NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGOconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be AREA.consistent with anticipated climate and conditions underwhich vehicle operations will occur. For the recom- WARNING!mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainte- • Do not leave children or animals inside parkednance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. CAUTION! • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people in the engine or damage may result. riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- ously injured or killed.NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its (Continued)first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat confined areas any longer than needed to move belts. your vehicle in or out of the area. 2• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate using a seat belt properly. open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at highExhaust Gas speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the WARNING! engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. SetExhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon the blower at high speed.monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.Breathing it can make you unconscious and can The best protection against carbon monoxide entry intoeventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaustfollow these safety tips: system. (Continued) Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
    • 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLEvehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding beltplete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, or retractor condition, replace the belt.damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open Air Bag Warning Lightseams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes The light should come on and remain on for four to eightto seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is firstinspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see yourfor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comesSafety Checks You Should Make Inside The on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-Vehicle rized dealer.Seat Belts DefrosterInspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and placefrays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced the blower control on high speed. You should be able toimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster isFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a inoperable.collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
    • THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83Floor Mat Safety Information WARNING! (Continued)Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of yourvehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area • Never place or install floor mats or other floorunobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and inter- 2cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedalsor impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. fering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. WARNING! • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per- of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. sonal injury. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al- • Always make sure that floor mats are properly ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that attached to the floor mat fasteners. have been removed for cleaning. (Continued) (Continued)
    • 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts WARNING! (Continued) and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob- (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. jects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle Lights control. Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights • If required, mounting posts must be properly while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high installed, if not equipped from the factory. beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or Door Latches mounting can cause interference with the brake Check for positive closing, latching, and locking. pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasolineThe Vehicle fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should beTires located and corrected immediately.Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wearpatterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECONTENTS 3Ⅵ Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . 89 Ⅵ Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 94 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 89 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 ▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . 91 ▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 ▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 ▫ Things You Should Know About Your ▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
    • 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEⅥ Voice Command — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Ⅵ Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 ▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . 123 ▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . 140 ▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 141 ▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Ⅵ Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 ▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 142 ▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment . . 132 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 ▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . 133 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Ⅵ To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Ⅵ Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 147 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 3 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Ⅵ Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 ▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Ⅵ Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 155 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink௡ . . 155Ⅵ Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 149 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 156Ⅵ Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 150 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 158 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 160 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 ▫ Using HomeLink௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
    • 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Ⅵ Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Ⅵ Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Express Mode . . . . . . . . 164 Ⅵ Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Express Mode . . . . . . . . 164 ▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 ▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 164 Ⅵ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ▫ Sliding Center Console Armrest . . . . . . . . . . 171 ▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ▫ Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 ▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Ⅵ Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 ▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89MIRRORSInside Day/Night Mirror — If EquippedA two-point pivot system allows for horizontal andvertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror tocenter on the view through the rear window. 3Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the smallcontrol under the mirror to the night position (toward therear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted whileset in the day position (toward the windshield). Inside Day/Night Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
    • 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEto the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when CAUTION!the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the rightof the button does not illuminate. To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe themoving in reverse. mirror clean. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror. NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the lane next to your vehicle. Automatic Dimming Mirror
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to 3 collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.Outside Mirrors Folding FeatureThe mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. Themirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of Folding Mirrorsthe vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards Power Mirrorsthe front of the vehicle. The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door trim panel. To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to
    • 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEmove. When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn Heated Mirrors — If Equippedthe control to the center position to prevent accidentally These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. Thismoving a mirror. feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur- ther information. Vanity Mirrors A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. Illuminated Vanity Mirrors An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically. Close the mirror cover to turn off the light. Power Mirror Control
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull rearward. 3 Illuminated Vanity Mirror“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of SunVisorTo use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate Slide-On-Rod Extenderthe sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it isparallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor withyour left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
    • 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEUconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED • www.jeep.com/uconnectUconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • or call 1–877–855–8400vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls betweenphone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’smobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi- microphone for private conversation.cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through youryour radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone. Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone Uconnect™ features Bluetooth௡ technology - the globalequipped with the Bluetooth௡ “Hands-Free Profile”, Ver- standard that enables different electronic devices to con-sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for nect to each other without wires or a docking station, sosupported phones. Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), asFor Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following long as your phone is turned on and has been paired towebsites: the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone• www.chrysler.com/uconnect allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the• www.dodge.com/uconnect
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be Voice Command Buttonused with the system at a time. The system is available in Actual button location may vary with the ra-English, Spanish, or French languages. dio. The individual buttons are described in the “Operation” section. WARNING! The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free 3 Any voice commanded system should be used only Profile certified Bluetooth௡ mobile phone. See the in safe driving conditions following local laws and Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your phone use. All attention should be kept on the mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a details. collision causing serious injury or death. The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-Uconnect™ Phone Button cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone The radio or steering wheel controls (if can be adjusted either from the radio volume control equipped) will contain the two control buttons knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right (Uconnect™ Phone button and Voice Com- switch), if so equipped. mand button) that will enable you to The radio display will be used for visual prompts fromaccess the system. When you press the button you will the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID onhear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep certain radios.is your signal to give a command.
    • 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOperation example, you can use the compound form voiceVoice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™ command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can breakPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone the compound form command into two voice com-menu structure. Voice commands are required after most mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re-Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a member, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when youspecific command and then guided through the available talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking tooptions. someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for Voice Command Tree the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an- Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. other prompt. Help Command• For certain operations, compound commands can be If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following “Pair a Device”, the following compound command the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth௡ Device”. options at any prompt if you ask for help.• For each feature explanation in this section, only the To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the compound form of the voice command is given. You button and follow the audible prompts for directions. can also break the commands into parts and say each Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the part of the command when you are asked for it. For button on the radio control head.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97Cancel Command • When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and and follow the audible prompts.you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a • You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-few instances the system will take you back to the fication Number (PIN), which you will later need toprevious menu. enter into your mobile phone. You can enter anyPair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN 3To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair after the initial pairing process.your compatible Bluetooth௡ enabled mobile phone. • For identification purposes, you will be prompted toTo complete the pairing process, you will need to refer- give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobileence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should beUconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc- given a unique phone name.tions for pairing. • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone aThe following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone priority level between one and seven, with one beingpairing instructions: the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any• Press the button to begin. given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority “Device Pairing”. allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
    • 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the • The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three and then dial. The number will appear in the display and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the of certain radios. Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile Call By Saying A Name phone when you make a call. You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to • Press the button to begin. “Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section). • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayDial By Saying A Number “Call”.• Press the button to begin. • The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call.• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Dial”. • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say the name of the person you want to call. For example,• The system will prompt you to say the number you you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ- want to call. ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”. or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99• The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and • When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., then dial the corresponding phone number, which “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will may appear in the display of certain radios. allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone- book entry, if desired.Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook • When prompted, recite the phone number for theNOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is 3 phonebook entry that you are adding.recommended when the vehicle is not in motion. After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-• Press the button to begin. book, you will be given the opportunity to add more• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the “Phonebook New Entry”. main menu.• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom- names in the phonebook with each name having up to mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert” four associated phone numbers and designations. Each instead of “Bob”. language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that language. In addition, if equipped and supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati- cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
    • 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPhonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-Transfer From Mobile Phone loaded, there may be a short delay before the latestIf equipped and specifically supported by your phone, downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s able for use.phonebook. Specific Bluetooth௡ Phones with Phone Book • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobileAccess Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™ phone is accessible.website for supported phones. • Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.• To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in book. “Call by Saying a Name” section. • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be as soon as the Bluetooth௡ wireless phone connection is edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans- made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next start the vehicle. phone connection.• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect™ Phone.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry inNOTE: the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended to the main menu. when the vehicle is not in motion. “Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be 3 phone number to a name entry that already exists in the deleted or edited. phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a• Press the button to begin. mobile and a home number, but you can add “John Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Entry” feature. “Phonebook Edit Entry”. Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit. NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.• Next, choose the number designation (home, work, mobile, or other) that you wish to edit. • Press the button to begin.• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say phonebook entry that you are editing. “Phonebook Delete”.
    • 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish • Press the button to begin. to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook “Phonebook Erase All”. from which you choose. To select one of the entries • The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you from the list, press the button while the wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook. Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say “Delete”. • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be deleted.• After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you is deleted. wish to delete. • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current deleted or edited. language is deleted. List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be • Press the button to begin. deleted or edited.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service “Phonebook List Names”. plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with• The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the your mobile service provider for the features that you phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone- have. book entries, if available. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call 3• To call one of the names in the list, press the Currently In Progress button during the playing of the desired name, and When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the say “Call”. Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete” tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer theoperations at this point. call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the call, press and hold the button until you hear a single• The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected. number designation you wish to call. Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call• The selected number will be dialed. Currently In ProgressPhone Call Features If a call is currently in progress and you have anotherThe following features can be accessed through the incoming call, you will hear the same network tones forUconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your call waiting that you normally hear when using your
    • 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEmobile phone. Press the button to place the current Place/Retrieve A Call From Holdcall on hold and answer the incoming call. To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. ToNOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the bring the call back from hold, press and hold themarket today do not support rejecting an incoming call button until you hear a single beep.when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user canonly answer an incoming call or ignore it. Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In press the button until you hear a single beep,Progress indicating that the active and hold status of the two callsTo make a second call while you are currently on a call, have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at apress the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed time.by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish tocall. The first call will be on hold while the second call is Conference Callin progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling When two calls are in progress (one active and one onBetween Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer hold), press and hold the button until you hear ato “Conference Call” in this section. double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105Three-Way Calling • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayTo initiate three-way calling, press the button while “Redial”.a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as • The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number thatdescribed under “Making a Second Call While Current was dialed from your mobile phone.Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,press and hold the button until you hear a double NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the 3beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into Uconnect™ Phone.one conference call. Call ContinuationCall Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on theTo end a call in progress, momentarily press the Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has beenbutton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call canon hold may not become active automatically. This is cell continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the callphone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictatesand hold the button until you hear a single beep. cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone andRedial transfer of the call to the mobile phone.• Press the button to begin.
    • 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura- voice commands will be in that language. tion, after which the call is automatically transferred NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone. operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-• An active call is automatically transferred to the book is usable. The paired phone name is not language- mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF. specific and is usable across all languages.Uconnect™ Phone Features Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone isLanguage Selection reachable:To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone isusing: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area.• Press the button to begin. If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say operational, you may reach the emergency number as the name of the language you wish to switch to follows: English, Espanol, or Francais. • Press the button to begin.• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say WARNING! “Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num- To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer- ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and gency, your mobile phone must be: Mexico. • turned on,NOTE: • paired to the Uconnect™ System, 3• The emergency number dialed is based on the country • and have network coverage. where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may Towing Assistance not be applicable with the available mobile service and If you need towing assistance: area. • Press the button to begin.• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say some systems. To do this, press the button and say “Towing Assistance”. “Setup”, followed by “Emergency”. NOTE:• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the chances of successfully making a phone call as to that country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528- for the mobile phone directly. 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14- 3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
    • 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour Working With Automated Systems “Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in This method is used in instances where one generally has the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while Towing Assistance references. navigating through an automated telephone system.• If supported, this number may be programmable on You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice some systems. To do this, press the button and say mail system or an automated service, such as a paging “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”. service or automated customer service line. Some ser- vices require immediate response selection. In somePaging instances, that may be too quick for use of theTo learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated Uconnect™ Phone.Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers ofcertain companies, which time out a little too soon to When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone thatwork properly with the Uconnect™ Phone. normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad, you can press theVoice Mail Calling button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followedTo learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enterwith Automated Systems”. your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109is also to be used for navigating through an automated Barge In — Overriding Promptscustomer service center menu structure, and to leave a The “Voice Command” button can be used when younumber on a pager. wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. For example, if a prompt isYou can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” youas tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to 3entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to select that option without having to listen to the rest ofcall and then press the button and say, “Send.” The the voice prompt.system will prompt you to enter the name or number andsay the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFFThe Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the systemphone number associated with the phonebook entry, as from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™tones over the phone. Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).NOTE: • Press the button to begin.• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say network configurations. This is normal. one of the following:• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time − “Setup Confirmation Prompts On” out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature. − “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
    • 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPhone And Network Status Indicators NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send theIf available on the radio and/or on a premium display dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehiclesuch as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation,your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that thenotification to inform you of your phone and network call did not go through even though the call is in progress.status when you are attempting to make a phone call Once your call is answered, you will hear the audio.using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)signal strength, phone battery strength, etc. When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still beDialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad able to hear the conversation coming from the otherYou can dial a phone number with your mobile phone party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. Inkeypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise • Press the button.caution and take precautionary safety measures). Bydialing a number with your paired Bluetooth௡ mobile • Following the beep, say “Mute”.phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the sameas if you dial the number using Voice Command. • Press the button. • Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Mobile Phone NamesTransfer Call To And From Mobile Phone • Press the button to begin.The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, sayferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone “Setup Phone Pairing”.without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing callfrom your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones”. 3Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the button • The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names ofand say “Transfer Call”. all paired mobile phones in order from the highest toConnect Or Disconnect Link Between The the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a pairedUconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone phone being announced, press the button andYour mobile phone can be paired with many different say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec-electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected” tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” awith one electronic device at a time. paired phone.If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth௡ Select Another Mobile Phoneconnection between your mobile phone and the This feature allows you to select and start using anotherUconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de- phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual. • Press the button to begin.
    • 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the button at any time while the “Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts. list is being played, and then choose the phone you wish to delete.• You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played, and then choose the phone that Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™ you wish to select. Phone• The selected phone will be used for the next phone Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial call. If the selected phone is not available, the To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.” priority phone present in or near (approximately Voice Training within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle. For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™ Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this• Press the button to begin. training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from “Setup Phone Pairing”. radio mode):• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the • Press and hold the button for five seconds until prompts. the session begins, or,
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113• Press the button and say the “Voice Training, This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries, System Training, or Start Voice Training” command. and other settings in all language modes. The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings.You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button torestore the factory setting or repeat the words and Voice Commandphrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to 3best results, the Voice Training session should be com- provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overheadpleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine console (if equipped) and the mirror.running, all windows closed, and the blower fanswitched off. • Always wait for the beep before speaking.This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you wouldsystem will adapt to the last trained voice only. speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from you.Reset • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking• press the button. during a Voice Command period.• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say “Setup”, then “Reset”.
    • 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Performance is maximized under: • It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook. • low-to-medium blower setting, • Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo- • low-to-medium vehicle speed, cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the • low road noise, entries are not similar. • smooth road surface, • Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • fully closed windows, • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero). • dry weather condition. • Even though international dialing for most number• Even though the system is designed for users speaking combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- number combinations may not be supported. cents, the system may not always work for some. • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be• When navigating through an automated system such compromised with the convertible top down. as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115Far End Audio Performance • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down.• Audio quality is maximized under: Recent Calls • low-to-medium blower setting, If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down- • low-to-medium vehicle speed, load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- ing and Missed Calls. 3 • low road noise, SMS • smooth road surface, Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on • fully closed windows, your phone. • dry weather conditions, and Read Messages: If you receive a new text message while your phone is • operation from the driver’s seat. connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness be made to notify you that you have a new text message. to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and If you wish to hear the new message: not the Uconnect™ Phone. • Press the button.• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume. “SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
    • 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for List of Preset Messages: you. 1. YesAfter reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward” 2. Nothe message using Uconnect™ Phone. 3. Where are you?Send Messages:You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send 4. I need more direction.a new message: 5. L O L• Press the button. 6. Why• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say 7. I love you “SMS Send” or “Send Message.” 8. Call me• You can either say the message you wish to send or say “List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages. 9. Call me laterTo send a message, press the button while the 10. Thankssystem is listing the message and say “Send.” 11. See You in 15 minutesUconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or 12. I am on my waynumber of the person you wish to send the message to.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 11713. I’ll be late • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say “Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you14. Are you there yet? will then be given a choice to change it.15. Where are we meeting? Bluetooth௡ Communication Link16. Can this wait? Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection 317. Bye for now can generally be reestablished by switching the phone18. When can we meet off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth௡ ON mode.19. Send number to call Power-Up20. Start without me After switching the ignition key from OFF to either theTurn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF ON or ACC position, or after a language change, youTurning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using thethe system from announcing the new incoming mes- system.sages.• Press the button.
    • 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 3
    • 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Voice Commands Voice CommandsPrimary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)zero callone canceltwo confirmation prompts 3three continuefour deletefive dialsix downloadseven editeight emergencynine Englishstar (*) erase allplus (+) Espanolpound (#) Francaisadd location helpall home
    • 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Commands Voice CommandsPrimary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)language return to main menu return or main menulist names select phone selectlist phones sendmobile set up phone settings or phonemute set upmute off towing assistancenew entry transfer callno Uconnect™ Tutorialother try againpair a phone voice trainingphone pairing pairing workphonebook phone book yespreviousrecord againredial
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123General Information NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice InterfaceThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability ofRSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-following conditions: mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the 3 WARNING! user’s authority to operate the equipment. Any voice commanded system should be used only• This device may not cause harmful interference. in safe driving conditions following local laws. All• This device must accept any interference received, attention should be kept on the roadway ahead. including interference that may cause undesired Failure to do so may result in a collision causing operation. serious injury or death.VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED When you press the Voice Command button, youVoice Command System Operation will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a This Voice Command system allows you to command. control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
    • 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and atseconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.options. The system will best recognize your speech if the win-If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan isoptions, press the Voice Command button, listen set to low.for the beep, and say your command. At any point, if the system does not recognize one of yourPressing the Voice Command button while the commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or mand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.change commands. This will become helpful once youstart to learn the options. Commands The Voice Command system understands two types ofNOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, commands. Universal commands are available at all“Help” or “Main Menu”. times. Local commands are available if the supportedThese commands are universal and can be used from any radio mode is active.menu. All other commands can be used depending uponthe active application.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125Changing the Volume • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command • “Setup” (to switch to system setup) button. Radio AM2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In this mode, you may say the following commands: 33. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust thevolume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for • “Next Station” (to select the next station)Voice Command is different than the audio system. • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)Main MenuStart a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)menu. Radio FMIn this mode, you can say the following commands: To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode) this mode, you may say the following commands:• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) • “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
    • 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE• “Next Station” (to select the next station) • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station) Disc To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) may say the following commands:• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) • “Track” (#) (to change the track)Satellite Radio • “Next Track” (to play the next track)To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “SatelliteRadio”. In this mode, you may say the following commands: • “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) spoken number) Memo• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel) To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) recording, you may press the Voice Command• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel) button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following commands:• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu) − “Save” (to save the memo)
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 − “Continue” (to continue recording) • “Switch to system setup” − “Delete” (to delete the recording) • “Change to setup”• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) • “Main menu setup” or — During the playback you may press the Voice • “Switch to setup” Command button to stop playing memos. You 3 proceed by saying one of the following commands: In this mode, you may say the following commands: − “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) • “Language English” − “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Language French” − “Previous” (to play the previous memo) • “Language Spanish” − “Delete” (to delete a memo) • “Tutorial”• “Delete All” (to delete all memos) • “Voice Training”Setup NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VoiceTo switch to system setup, you may say on of the Command button first and wait for the beep beforefollowing: speaking the “Barge In” commands.• “Change to setup”
    • 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEVoice Training WARNING!For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™ • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside orVoice “Voice Training” feature may be used. outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System or killed.Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “VoiceTraining.” This will train your own voice to the system • Do not allow people to ride in any area of yourand will improve recognition. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training” • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat andsession should be completed when the vehicle is parked, using a seat belt properly.engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fanswitched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new Power Seatsuser. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches areSEATS used to control the position of the seat.Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of thevehicle.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Tilting The Seat Up Or Down 3 The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. Power Seat Switch Power Lumbar — If EquippedAdjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seatsThe seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbarPush the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.when the desired position has been reached.
    • 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPush the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar sup- WARNING!port. Pushing upward or downward on the switch willraise and lower the position of the support. • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Power Lumbar Switch
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. CAUTION! Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of Do not place any article under a power seat or heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF. the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if Press the switch once to select HIGH-level movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s heating. Press the switch a second time to select 3 path. LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF.Heated SeatsThe front driver and passenger seats may be equipped If HIGH-level heating is selected, the system will auto-with heaters in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The matically switch to the LOW-level after a maximum ofheaters provide the same average heat level for both the 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, thecushion and the seatback. number of indicators illuminated changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the LOW-levelThere are two heated seat switches that allow the driver setting also turns OFF automatically after a maximum ofand passenger to operate the seats independently. The 45 minutes.controls for each seat are located near the bottom centerof the instrument panel. NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.
    • 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment WARNING! The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear- because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, ward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex- desired. Using body pressure, move forward and rear- haustion or other physical condition must exercise ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns latched. even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. WARNING!• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be seat that has been overheated could cause serious properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat only while the vehicle is parked. the seat.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133Manual Front Seatback Recline WARNING!To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on theoutboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that theposition and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.the lever, lean forward and release the lever. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. 3 Recline Lever
    • 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEPassenger Seat Easy EntryOn the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever locatedon the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatbackand slide the seat forward. You can also temporarilyremove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat andallow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allowsfor easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to anormal seating position, first return the seatback to itsoriginal recline location and then slide the entire seatback to the pre-set lock position. Easy Entry Lever
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135Head Restraints Active Head Restraints — Front Seats The front driver and passenger seats are equipped withHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rearby restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact the AHRs will automatically extend forwardimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top minimizing the gap between the back of the occupantsof the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. head and the AHR. 3 WARNING! The AHRs will automatically return to their normal position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not The head restraints for all occupants must be prop- return to their normal position see your authorized erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu- dealer immediately. pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad- justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
    • 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed byrestraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If eitherbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and push of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-downward on the head restraint. rized dealer. WARNING! Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death. Rear Head Restraints The center rear head restraint has two positions, up or down. When the seat is being occupied the head restraint should raised. When there are no occupants in the center Push Button seat position the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head Folding Rear Seatrestraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide anbutton, located at the base of the head restraint, and push additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on thedownward on the head restraint. upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when not in use. 3 Push ButtonNOTE: The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Folding Rear SeatBefore Starting Your Vehicle” for tether routing.
    • 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position. If the seatback is not securely locked into position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. • The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down position) should not be used as a play area by children when the vehicle is in motion. They could be seriously injured in a collision. Children Folded Rear Seat should be seated and using the proper restraintWhen the seatback is folded to the upright position, make system.sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of theseatback above the seat strap.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safetyTwo latches must be released to open the hood. catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the center front edge of the hood.1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left sideof the instrument panel. 3 Hood Safety Catch Hood Release Lever
    • 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE LIGHTS CAUTION! Headlights And Parking LightsTo prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to The headlight switch is located on the left side of theclose it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi- instrument panel. This switch controls the operation ofmately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fogthe hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. lights. WARNING!Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving yourvehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could openwhen the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.Failure to follow this warning could result in seriousinjury or death.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A (AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights 3 will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition in the OFF position. To turn the automatic system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position. NOTE: The engine must be running before the head- Headlight Switch lights will come on in the automatic mode.Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent Headlights On With Wipers (Available Withfor parking light and instrument panel light operation. Automatic Headlights Only)Turn it to the second detent for headlight, parking light When this feature is active, the headlights will turn onand instrument panel light operation. approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
    • 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEaddition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they willturned off if they were turned on by this feature. turn off in the normal manner.The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 secondsdisabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center of placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Under- feature.standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer toHeadlight Time Delay “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understandingfor up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an Your Instrument Panel” for further information.unlit area. Daytime Running Lights — If EquippedTo activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF The headlights will come on as Daytime Running Lightsposition while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off whenever the ignition is placed in the RUN position, thethe headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval headlights are off and the parking brake is released. Thebegins when the headlight switch is turned off. headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime driving.If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place If vehicle is equipped with High Intensity Discharge Head-the ignition in the RUN position again, the system will lights, the front turn signal lamps provide the Daytimecancel the delay. Running Lamp (DRL) function. If equipped, the DRL will
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143flash when a turn signal is in operation, and return to DRL and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fogmode when the turn signal is no longer flashing. lights, either press the headlight switch again or turn off the headlight switch. WARNING! A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned 3 ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro- cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.Lights-On ReminderIf the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignitionis in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert thedriver when the driver’s door is opened.Fog Lights — If Equipped Fog Light Operation The front fog light switch is built into the head- An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn when the fog lights are turned on. on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
    • 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLENOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beamheadlights or parking lights on. However, selecting thehigh beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.Multifunction LeverThe multifunction lever controls the operation of the turnsignals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. Themultifunction lever is located on the left side of thesteering column. Multifunction Lever Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145NOTE: High/Low Beam Switch• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is Flash-To-Pass defective. 3 You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Elec- lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a con- will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is tinuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more released. than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to-Lane Change Assist pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beamsTap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond will shut off.the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash Map/Reading Lightsthree times then automatically turn off. These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
    • 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEtransmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is Interior Lightsturned fully upward, past the second detent. The interior lights come on when a door is opened. To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, either place the ignition in the RUN position or cycle the light switch. Dimmer Control The dimmer control is located to the right of the head- light switch. With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the Overhead Console brightness of the instrument panel lights and, if equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets, door handles and cupholders.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147Dome Light PositionRotate the dimmer control completely upward to the seconddetent to turn on the interior lights. The interior lights willremain on when the dimmer control is in this position.Interior Light Defeat (OFF)Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off 3position. The interior lights will remain off when thedoors are open.Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.This feature brightens all text displays such as theodometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), Windshield Wiper/Washer Controland radio when the parking lights or headlights are on. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the firstWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper The multifunction lever operates the windshield operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in settings for high-speed wiper operation. the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunctionlever is located on the left side of the steering column.
    • 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Mist Feature CAUTION! Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist Turn the windshield wipers off when driving position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road through an automatic car wash. Damage to the wind- mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will shield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in continue to operate until you release the multifunction any position other than off. lever. NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washerIntermittent Wiper System pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on theUse the intermittent wiper when weather conditions windshield. The wash function must be used in order tomake a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be- spray the windshield with washer fluid.tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the Windshield Washersend of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inwardare four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the (toward the steering column) and hold it for as long aswipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second washer spray is desired.to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between If you activate the washer while the windshield wipercycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate forthe vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149three wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever Headlights On With Wipers (Available Withand then resume the intermittent interval previously Automatic Headlights Only)selected. When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned onIf you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO)turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when 3and then turn off. the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. WARNING! The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center could lead to a collision. You might not see other (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Fea- vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of tures)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for the windshield during freezing weather, warm the further information. windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
    • 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEhandle is located below the steering wheel at the end of wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock thethe steering column. steering column in position, push the lever upward until fully engaged. WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv- ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve- hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. Tilt Steering Column Lever ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPEDTo unlock the steering column, push the lever downward When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mphsteering wheel upward or downward as desired. To (40 km/h).lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated atright side of the steering wheel. the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. To Activate 3 Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. WARNING! Electronic Speed Control Buttons Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES + when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally4 — CANCEL 3 — SET - set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec- You could lose control and have an accident. Alwaystronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
    • 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETo Set A Desired Speed To Resume SpeedTurn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button button and release. Resume can be used at any speedand release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will above 20 mph (32 km/h).operate at the selected speed. To Vary The Speed SettingNOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-speed and on level ground before pressing the SET crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the buttonbutton. is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new setTo Deactivate speed will be established.A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCELbutton, or normal brake pressure while slowing the Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mphvehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap oferasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the setspeed memory.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintainsset, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually speed up and down hills. A slight speed change onheld in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to moderate hills is normal.decrease until the button is released. Release the button On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur sowhen the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speedwill be established. 3 Control.Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of WARNING!the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h). Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where theTo Accelerate For Passing system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and youpedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roadsUsing Electronic Speed Control On Hills that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain thevehicle set speed.
    • 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOVERHEAD CONSOLE Courtesy/Reading LightsThe overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights At the forward end of the overhead console are twoand sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener courtesy/reading lights.(HomeLink௡) button and a power sunroof switch mayalso be included, if equipped. Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time to turn off the light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the second detent. Sunglasses Storage At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” de- sign. Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open. Push on the raised bar to close. Overhead Console
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPEDHomeLink௡ replaces up to three hand-held transmittersthat operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-ized gates, lighting or home security systems. TheHomeLink௡ unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Voltbattery. 3The HomeLink௡ buttons that are located in the overheadconsole designate the three different HomeLink௡ chan-nels. HomeLink௡ Buttons NOTE: HomeLink௡ is disabled when the Vehicle Secu- rity Alarm is active. Before You Begin Programming HomeLinkா Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.
    • 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEFor more efficient programming and accurate transmis- • If you have any problems, or require assistance, pleasesion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet ata new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink௡ Programming A Rolling Codesystem. For programming garage door openers that were manu-Erase all channels before you begin programming. To factured after 1995. These garage door openers can beerase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button locatedposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink௡ where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage doorbuttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The Electronic opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used toVehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display “CLEAR- open and close the door. The name and color of theING CHANNELS”. Release the buttons when the EVIC button may vary by manufacturer.displays “CHANNELS CLEARED”.NOTE:• Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink௡ for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink௡ button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- ter button. 4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN- NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons. 3 NOTE: • It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased for the channel to train. • If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from Training The Garage Door Opener Step 2.1 — Door Opener 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),2 — Training Button locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.8 cm) away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish toprogram.
    • 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEOn some garage door openers/devices there may be a Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Buttonlight that blinks when the garage door opener/device is To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. follow these steps:NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.step after the LEARN button has been pressed. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do notHomeLink௡ button twice (holding the button for two release the button.seconds each time). The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-TRANSMIT”. If the garage door opener/device activates, ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remainingprogramming is complete. steps.NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not Programming A Non-Rolling Codeactivate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to For programming Garage Door Openers manufacturedcomplete the training. before 1995.To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons, 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOTerase the channels.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1592. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button.8 cm) away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish to The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If theprogram. garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink௡button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- To program the remaining two HomeLink௡ buttons,ter button. repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT 3 erase the channels.4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC displaychanges from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ ButtonNEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons. To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:NOTE:• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. for the channel to train. 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until• If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not Step 2. release the button.
    • 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 toming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain- 8 cm) away from the HomeLink௡ button you wish toing steps. program.Canadian/Gate Operator Programming 3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink௡For programming transmitters in Canada/United States button while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after held transmitter every two seconds.several seconds of transmission. 4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC displayCanadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig- changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN-nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans- NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink௡ NOTE:to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this • It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some casedCanadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to for the channel to train.time-out in the same manner. • If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat fromIt may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling Step 2.process to prevent possible overheating of the garagedoor or gate motor.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1615. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink௡ button. Using HomeLinkாThe EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If the To operate, press and release the programmeddevice is plugged in and activates, programming is HomeLink௡ button. Activation will now occur for thecomplete. programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera- tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may 3programming, plug it back in at this time. also be used at any time.Reprogramming A Single HomeLink௡ Button SecurityTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turnfollow these steps: in your vehicle.1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To erase the channels press and hold the two outside2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink௡ button until HomeLink௡ buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. Thethe EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will displayrelease the button. “CLEARING CHANNELS”. Release the buttons when the EVIC displays “CHANNELS CLEARED”.3. Without releasing the button proceed with“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and The HomeLink௡ Universal Transceiver is disabled whenfollow all remaining steps. the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
    • 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLETroubleshooting Tips WARNING!If you are having trouble programming HomeLink௡, hereare some of the most common solutions: • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver.• Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit- Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or ter. other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener use this transceiver with a garage door opener that to complete the training for a Rolling Code. has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage• Did you unplug the device for programming and door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not remember to plug it back in? use a garage door opener without these safety fea-If you have any problems, or require assistance, please tures. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internetcall toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at at www.HomeLink.com for safety information orwww.HomeLink.com for information or assistance. assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163General Information POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPEDThis device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sunCanada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 32. This device must accept any interference that may bereceived including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.NOTE:• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com- pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. Power Sunroof Switch• The term IC before the certification/registration num- ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
    • 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Opening Sunroof — Express Mode WARNING! Press the switch rearward and release it and the sunroof• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in will open automatically from any position. The sunroof the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the will open fully and stop automatically. This is called Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped “Express Open”. During “Express Open” operation, any with Keyless Enter-N-Go). Occupants, particularly movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode switch. Such entrapment may result in serious To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward injury or death. to full open.• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being Closing Sunroof — Express Mode thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You Press the switch forward and release it and the sunroof could also be seriously injured or killed. Always will close automatically from any position. The sunroof fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all will close fully and stop automatically. This is called passengers are also properly secured. “Express Close”. During “Express Close” operation, any• Do not allow small children to operate the sun- movement of the switch will stop the sunroof. roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object, to project through the sunroof opening. Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode Injury may result. To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the forward position.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165Pinch Protect Feature Venting Sunroof — ExpressThis feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof willthe sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob- open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the and will occur regardless of sunroof position. Duringsunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc- Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch willtion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and stop the sunroof. 3release to Express Close. Sunshade OperationNOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re- The sunshade can be opened manually. However, thesult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof isdisabled. open.Pinch Protect Override Wind BuffetingIf a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing Wind buffeting can be described as the perception ofthe sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in theseconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with theto move toward the closed position. windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certainNOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-pressed. rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
    • 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEthe rear windows open, open the front and rear windows This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigartogether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs lighter unit. If desired, the front power outlet can bewith the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to converted by your authorized dealer to provide powerminimize the buffeting or open any window. when the ignition is placed in the OFF position.Sunroof Maintenance NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR௡ knobUse only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean and element must be used.the glass panel. CAUTION!Ignition Off OperationThe power sunroof switches remain active for up to • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Wattsapproximately ten minutes after the ignition switch has (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)been turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting thethis feature. system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugsELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS only. Do not insert any other object in the powerThere are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) electrical power outlets outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow theon this vehicle. Both of the outlets are protected by a fuse. fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can causeThe front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limitedwhen the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position. Warranty.
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 3 Front Power Outlet Center Console Power OutletThe center console power outlet is powered directly fromthe battery (power available at all times).
    • 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEItems plugged into this power outlet may discharge the WARNING!battery and/or prevent the engine from starting. To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Power Outlet Fuse Locations1 — #18 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel2 — #9 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw • After the use of high power draw accessories or power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in long periods of the vehicle not being started (with use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. 3 discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, only. Do not insert any other object in the power vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the battery even more quickly. Only use these inter- fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause mittently and with greater caution. damage not covered by your warranty. (Continued)
    • 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLECUPHOLDERS Illuminated Front Cupholders — If Equipped The front cupholders are illuminated with LEDs. TheyFront Cupholders are turned on with the headlights or parking lights. ReferThe front cupholders are located in the center console. to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Rear Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s el- bows. Front Cupholders
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 CONSOLE FEATURES Sliding Center Console Armrest The center console armrest slides forward with three detents to provide flexibility for comfort, cupholder use and shifting ease. 3Rear Cupholders Sliding Console Armrest
    • 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLEConsole StorageThe center console has a storage compartment locatedunderneath the armrest, and also contains a 12 Voltpower outlet, a molded-in coin holder (designed to holdvarious size coins). The center console may also beequipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod௡ andiPhone௡ devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface(UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instru-ment Panel” for further information. Center Console
    • UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear WARNING! window defroster only when the engine is operating. Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart- ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music CAUTION! players, and other handheld electronic devices Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices the heating elements: 3 while driving can cause an accident due to distrac- • Use care when washing the inside of the rear tion, resulting in death or injury. window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft clothREAR WINDOW FEATURES and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel toRear Window Defroster the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off The rear window defroster button is located on the after soaking with warm water. climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button to • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside sive window cleaners on the interior surface of themirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will window.illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes ofoperation, press the button a second time.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCONTENTSⅥ Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If Equipped . . 198Ⅵ Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 ▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) — 4 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Ⅵ Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 180 ▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Ⅵ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 190 ▫ System Warnings ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 201 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 ▫ Personal Settings ▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . 194 (Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . 202 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Ⅵ Media Center 730N/430/430N ▫ Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 (RHR/RER/RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
    • 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 ▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 226 ▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) ▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 226 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 ▫ Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) —Ⅵ Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) . . . . . . . . . 206 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 207 Ⅵ iPod௡/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 231 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD ▫ Connecting The iPod௡ Or External USB And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 ▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 214 ▫ Controlling The iPod௡ Or External USBⅥ Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 (Sales Code RES+RSC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 ▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 215 ▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD ▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . 237 And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177Ⅵ Harman Kardon௡ Logic7௡ High Performance Ⅵ Radio Operation And Mobile Phones . . . . . . . 241 Multichannel Surround Sound System With Ⅵ Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . 242Ⅵ Steering Wheel Audio Controls — If Equipped . 239 ▫ Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 ▫ Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 ▫ Manual Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 4Ⅵ CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
    • 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES1 — Air Outlets 6 — ESC OFF Switch 11 — Ignition Switch2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Sport Button 12 — Trunk Release Button3 — Glove Compartment 8 — Hazard Warning Switch 13 — Headlight Switch4 — Radio 9 — Heated Steering Wheel Switch5 — Heated Seat Switch 10 — Climate Control
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 4
    • 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELINSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light This light will turn on when the electronic1. Fuel Gauge speed control is on.The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank whenthe ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.2. Trip Odometer Button 5. TachometerPress this button to change the odometer line (bottom The red segments indicate the maximum permissibleline) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gearfrom odometer to Trip Odometer A to Trip Odometer B range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the redand back to odometer. Push in and hold the button for area.two seconds to reset the displayed trip odometer to 6. Charging System Warning Light0 miles (km). The trip odometer must be displayed to This light shows the status of the electrical charg-reset it. ing system. The light should turn on when the3. Speedometer ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position andIndicates vehicle speed. remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine speed (if at idle). If the light remains on,
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181it means that the charging system is experiencing a If the light is flashing when the engine is running,problem. See your local authorized dealer to obtain immediate service is required. In this case, you mayservice immediately. experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump StartingProcedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”. Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not come on during starting.7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check 8. Temperature Gauge 4 when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/ The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera- RUN position. This light will also turn on while ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine is running if there is a problem with the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed toplace the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key. exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with theengine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon aspossible.
    • 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 9. Turn Signal Indicators CAUTION! The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signalDriving with a hot engine cooling system could when the turn signal lever is operated.damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads NOTE:“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is drivenwith the air conditioner turned off until the pointer more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.drops back into the normal range. If the pointerremains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if eitherengine OFF immediately and call for service. indicator flashes at a rapid rate. 10. Air Bag Warning Light WARNING! This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is firstA hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light isothers could be badly burned by steam or boiling either not on during starting, stays on, or turnscoolant. You may want to call a service center if your on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho-vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupanthood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle” Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Yourand follow the warnings under the Cooling System Vehicle” for further information.Pressure Cap paragraph.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 18311. Engine Temperature Warning Light cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles This light will turn on and a single chime will (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the When this light turns on, the engine temperature problem diagnosed and corrected.is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely NOTE:pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESCturned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos- Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-sible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to 4Do In Emergencies” for further information). ON/RUN.12. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/ • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESCMalfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when the ignition switch is turned to the when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop ON/RUN position. It should go out with the when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuverengine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In- that caused the ESC activation.dicator Light” comes on continuously with the enginerunning, a malfunction has been detected in the ESCsystem. If this light remains on after several ignition
    • 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL13. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator 15. High Beam IndicatorLight — If Equipped This indicator will turn on when the high beam This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con- headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever trol (ESC) is off. away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam. 16. Seat Belt Reminder Light14. Oil Pressure Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The a bulb check when the ignition switch is first light should turn on momentarily when the engine placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if theis started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. Thevehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continu-chime will sound when this light turns on. ously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after theDo not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Re-This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. straints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve-The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. hicle” for further information.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 18517. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission the repair technician should leave the odometer readingOnly the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/heThe Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, andinstrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what theautomatic transmission. mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if 4 the odometer must be reset at zero.19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center The EVIC features a driver-interactive display, for further(EVIC) Display Area information refer to ЉElectronic Vehicle Information Cen-The odometer display shows the total distance the ve- ter (EVIC)”.hicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi-vidual trip mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for 20. Brake Warning Lightadditional information. This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brakeNOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans- application. If the brake light turns on it mayfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur-chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has beendriven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
    • 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELindicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharpfluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-anti-lock brake system reservoir. tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.If the light remains on when the parking brake has beendisengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake sary.hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light willremain on until the condition has been corrected. WARNING!The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It willsystem. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have aindicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder hasdropped below a specified level. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake ForceThe light will remain on until the cause is corrected. Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lightturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the Each tire, including the spare (if provided),ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap- should be checked monthly when cold and in-proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off flated to the inflation pressure recommended byunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placarddetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofinspected by an authorized dealer. a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter-The light also will turn on when the parking brake is mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) 4applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-tion. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemNOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale whenapplied. It does not show the degree of brake application. one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi- possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also until the vehicle is disarmed. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
    • 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPlease note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or moretire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that themaintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSnot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS to continue to function properly.low tire pressure telltale. CAUTION!Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not The TPMS has been optimized for the originaloperating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures andcombined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the warning have been established for the tire sizesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-approximately one minute and then remain continuously tion or sensor damage may result when using re-illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- placement equipment that is not of the same size,quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causeWhen the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can ortem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with aas intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.of reasons, including the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 18923. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light 25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. Theswitch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay OBD system monitors engine and automaticon for as long as four seconds. transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engineIf the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the keythen the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is notfunctioning and service is required. However, the con- from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked 4 promptly.ventional brake system will continue to operate normallyif the BRAKE warning light is not on. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL afterIf the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MILas soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. InBrakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and willignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have not require towing.the light inspected by an authorized dealer.24. Low Fuel Light This light will turn on and a single chime will sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
    • 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER CAUTION! (EVIC)Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-damage to the engine control system. It also could tures a driver-interactive display which is located in theaffect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is instrument cluster.flashing, severe catalytic converter damage andpower loss will soon occur. Immediate service isrequired. WARNING!A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referencedabove, can reach higher temperatures than in normaloperating conditions. This can cause a fire if youdrive slowly or park over flammable substances suchas dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could resultin death or serious injury to the driver, occupants orothers. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191This system conveniently allows the driver to select a • Surround Sound Modes (if equipped with Driver-variety of useful information by pressing the switches Selectable Surround [DSS])mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the The system allows the driver to select information byfollowing: pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering• System Status wheel:• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays• Tire Pressure Monitor System 4• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)• Compass Display• Outside Temperature Display• Trip Computer Functions• Uconnect™ phone (If Equipped)• Uconnect™ gps Screens (If Equipped) EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons• Audio Mode Display
    • 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELMENU Button SELECT Button Press and release the MENU button to access Press and release the SELECT button for access the main menu, or to return to the main menu to main menus, sub-menus or to select a per- from the sub-menus. sonal setting in the setup menu. Press and hold the SELECT button for two seconds to resetUP Button features. Press and release the UP button to scroll up- Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) ward through the main menus and sub-menus. Displays When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays the following messages:DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to scroll • Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if downward through the main menus and sub- the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with menus. either turn signal on) • Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single • Did Not Train chime) • Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime)• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK • Service TPM System (with a single chime)• Door Ajar • ESC Off – Electronic Stability Control is deactivated• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in • ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped motion) • Check Gascap 4• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime) • Key Fob Battery Low• Oil Change Required • Service Keyless System• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime) • Wrong Key• Channel # Transmit • Damaged Key• Channel # Training • Key not Programmed• Channel # Trained • Vehicle Not in Park• Clearing Channels • Key Fob Not Detected• Channels Cleared
    • 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Press Brake & Push Button to Start position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go. To turn off the• Push Button or Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to message temporarily, press and release the MENU but- “Remote Starting System” in “Things To Know Before ton. To reset the oil change indicator system (after Starting Your Vehicle”) performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the fol-• 1–4 SKIPSHIFT lowing procedure.Engine Oil Change Indicator System Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-GoOil Change Required 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINEYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message RUN position (Do not start the engine.)will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec- 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three timesonds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the within 10 seconds.next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil changeindicator system is duty cycle based, which means the 3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINEengine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent START/STOP button once to return the ignition to theupon your personal driving style. OFF/LOCK position.Unless reset, this message will continue to display eachtime you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go • Trip B1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do • Elapsed Timenot start the engine.) • Display Units of Measure in2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times Press the UP or DOWN buttons to cycle through all thewithin 10 seconds. Trip Computer functions.3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. The Trip Functions mode displays the following. 4NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — Ifstart the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Equippedreset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.Trip Functions When the fuel economy is reset, the display will readPress and release the MENU button until one of the “RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, thefollowing Trip Functions displays in the EVIC: history information will be erased, and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode reset.• Distance To Empty The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the• Trip A average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
    • 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELwill appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on fourcylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner. Fuel Saver Mode — Off • Distance To Empty (DTE) Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the Fuel Saver Mode — On fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is deter-This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving mined by a weighted average of the instantaneous andin a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tankdriving habits in order to increase fuel economy. level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT button.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle • Elapsed Timeloading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last resetthe vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ONWhen the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) or START position.estimated driving distance, the DTE display will changeto a text display of ЉLOW FUEL.Љ This display will • Display Units of Measure incontinue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a To make your selection, press and release the SELECTsignificant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears. 4ЉLOW FUELЉ text and a new DTE value will display. To Reset The Display• Trip A Reset will only occur while a resettable function is beingShows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once toreset. clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release the SELECT button• Trip B a second time within three seconds of resetting theShows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will displayreset. during this three-second window.)
    • 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSport Mode This light will illuminate when the sport mode is selected. This mode provides performance based tuning. For further information, refer to ”Sport Mode” in “Starting And Operating”.Keyless Enter-N-Go Display — If EquippedWhen the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed tochange ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-N-Goicon momentarily appears in the EVIC display showingthe new ignition switch position. Keyless Enter-N-Go Display The round symbol in the middle rotates to point at the new ignition switch position. If desired, the ignition switch position graphic can be set to be constantly visible by pressing the EVIC MENU button until the display appears.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operat- Compass Displaying” for more information. The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. Press and release theNOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be MENU button until “Compass” displays in thesuperseded by another display of higher priority. But EVIC.when the ignition switch position is changed, the display MENU Buttonalways re-appears. NOTE: The system will display the last known outsideDriver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) — If temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to 4EquippedPress and release the MENU button until “Surround be driven several minutes before the updated tempera-Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor- ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect themation on the current surround mode. displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.• Stereo Automatic Compass Calibration• Surround Sound This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates theWhile in the Surround Sound menu, press the SELECT need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle isbutton to change surround modes. new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
    • 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELdegree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic 5. Slowly complete one or more 360-degree turns (in anobjects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC area free from large metal or metallic objects) until theturns off. The compass will now function normally. “CAL” message turns off. The compass will now function normally.Manual Compass CalibrationIf the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message Compass Variancedoes not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the Compass Variance is the difference between Magneticcompass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows: North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where1. Turn the ignition switch ON. the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal set, the compass will automatically compensate for theSettings displays in the EVIC. differences and provide the most accurate compass head- ing.3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “CALIBRATECOMPASS” displays in the EVIC. NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compasscalibration. The message “CAL” will display in the EVIC. module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map. 5. Press and release the MENU button to exit. System Warnings (Customer Information Features) Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the Up or 4 DOWN button to display any one of the following choices. • Oil Temperature Compass Variance Map Shows the actual oil temperature.1. Turn the ignition switch ON. • Oil Pressure2. Press and release the MENU button until Personal Shows the actual oil pressure.Settings displays in the EVIC. • Tire Pressure3. Press the UP or DOWN button until “COMPASS Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDINGVARIANCE” message and the last variance zone number THE SPARE TIRE).displays in the EVIC.
    • 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPersonal Settings (Customer-Programmable Unlock Doors Automatically on ExitFeatures) When ON is selected, both doors will unlock when thePersonal Settings allows the driver to set and recall vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK orfeatures when the transmission is in PARK. NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To make your selection, press and release the SELECTPress and release the MENU button until Personal Set- button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.tings displays in the EVIC. Remote Key UnlockUse the UP or DOWN button to display one of the When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’sfollowing choices. door will unlock on the first press of the Remote KeylessLanguage Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When DriverWhen in this display you may select one of three lan- Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKEguages for all display nomenclature, including the trip transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen-functions and the Uconnect™ gps (if equipped). Press the ger door. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, both ofSELECT button while in this display to select English, the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKEEspanol, or Francais. Then, as you continue, the informa- transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,tion will display in the selected language. press and release the SELECT button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears.NOTE: The EVIC will not change the Uconnect™ lan-guage selection.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter- remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To makeN-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to your selection, press and release the SELECT button untilUnlock All Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no a check-mark appears next to the feature showing thematter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is system has been activated or the check-mark is removedgrasped. If Driver Door 1st Press is programmed, only showing the system has been deactivated.the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is Sound Horn with Remote Key Lockgrasped. With Passive Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur whenprogrammed touching the handle more than once will the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature 4only result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door may be selected with or without the Flash Lights withfirst is selected, once the driver door is opened, the Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, pressinterior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock and release the SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF”all doors (or use RKE transmitter). appears.Remote Start Comfort Sys. Flash Lights with Remote Key LockWhen this feature is selected and the remote start is When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals willactivated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with theseat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with orIn warm weather, the driver vented seat feature willautomatically turn on when the remote start is activated.These features will stay on through the duration of
    • 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELwithout the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make Delay Turning Headlights Offyour selection, press and release the SELECT button until When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to“ON” or “OFF” appears. have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, pressHeadlamps On with Wipers (Available with Auto and release the SELECT button until “0,” “30,” “60,” orHeadlamps Only) “90” appears.When ON is selected, and the headlight switch is in theAUTO (A) position, the headlamps will turn on approxi- Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equippedmately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer toheadlamps will also turn off when the wipers are turned “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting Andoff if they were turned on by this feature. To make your Operating” for system function and operating informa-selection, press and release the SELECT button until tion. To make your selection, press and release the“ON” or “OFF” appears. SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlockcauses the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activatebrightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors areFeatures Of Your Vehicle.” unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec- tion, press and release the SELECT button until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit Display ECO Mode — If EquippedWhen this feature is selected, the power window The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone (if equipped), power Temperature display; this message can be turned on orsunroof (if equipped), and ignition-powered power out- off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECTlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry)vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’sselection, press and release the SELECT button until door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock 4“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60 or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press andmin.” appears. release the SELECT button until a check-mark appearsTurn-by-Turn Navigation — If Equipped next to the feature showing the system has been activatedWhen ON is selected, the Turn-by-Turn directions will or the check-mark is removed showing the system hasappear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig- been deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” innated turn within a programmed route. To make your “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.selection, press and release the SELECT button until Enable/Disable the Rear Park Assist System“ON” or “OFF” appears. The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
    • 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ orSound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.make your selection, press and release the SELECT Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)button until a check-mark appears next to the feature — If Equippedshowing the system has been activated or the check-mark Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ Useris removed showing the system has been deactivated. Manual located on the DVD for further details.Refer to “Rear Park Assist System” in “UnderstandingThe Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — Ifoperating information. Equipped Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ UserDisplay Units of Measure In Manual located on the DVD for further details.The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect™ gps (if equipped)can be changed between English and Metric units of MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)measure. To make your selection, press and release theSELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears. NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPEDNOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right sideof the unit’s faceplate.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio. Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the 4 volume, and to the left decreases it. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played. Media Center 130 (RES) SEEK ButtonsOperating Instructions — Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the nextNOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switchposition to operate the radio. to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.
    • 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELTIME Button RW/FFPress the TIME button to alternate display of the time Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonsand radio frequency. causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in eitherClock Setting Procedure AM or FM frequencies.1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. TUNE Control2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwiseSCROLL control knob. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and FadeSCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASSwill begin to blink. will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a secondknob to save time change. time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds. mid-range tones.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbuttontime and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish tocontrol knob to the right or left to increase or decrease thetreble tones. commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the displayPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock ontotime and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ this station and press and release that button. If a buttonSCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust thesound level from the right or left side speakers. is not selected within five seconds after pressing the 4 SET/RND button, the station will continue to play butPush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time will not be stored into pushbutton memory.and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control You may add a second station to each pushbutton byknob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between repeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressthe front and rear speakers. the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in thePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 andexit setting tone, balance, and fade. SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.AM/FM Button The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected byPress the buttons to select either AM or FM mode. pressing the pushbutton twice.
    • 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELEvery time a preset button is used, a corresponding Inserting Compact Disc(s)button number will display. Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled intoButtons 1 - 6 the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on theThese buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more thanto pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations). 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must beDISC Button ejected before a new disc can be loaded.Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radioAM/FM modes to Disc modes. ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode andOperation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And begin to play when you insert the disc. The display willMP3 Audio Play show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.NOTE:• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC CAUTION! position to operate the radio. • This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), only. The use of other sized discs may damage the recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact CD player mechanism. discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks. (Continued)
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 SEEK Button CAUTION! (Continued) Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning away and jam the player mechanism. of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the • The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do previous selection if the CD is within the first second of not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK loaded. button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks inEJECT Button - Ejecting a CD CD and MP3 modes. 4 Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, RW/FFthe radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it. Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, orA disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF. RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on button works in a similar manner.convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). AM/FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
    • 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELSET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)Press this button while the CD is playing to activateThe medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660Random Play. This feature plays the selections on theLevel 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.compact disc in random order to provide an interesting When reading discs recorded using formats other thanchange of pace. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran- mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.domly selected track. The radio uses the following limits for file systems:Press the RND button a second time to stop RandomPlay. • Maximum number of folder levels: 8Notes on Playing MP3 Files • Maximum number of files: 255The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of filefile recording media and formats are limited. When names and folder names is limited. For large numbers ofwriting MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric- files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to displaytions. the file name and folder name, and will assign a numberSupported Media (Disc Types) instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceed-CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. ing 50 folders will result in this display.)
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to • Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the character extension) following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files • Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or character extension) VBR bit rate.Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre- Bit Rate (kbps)Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal cation quency (kHz) 4CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). 320, 256, 224,Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128,writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of 48, 44.1, 32 Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in 56, 48, 40, 32longer disc loading times. 160, 128, 144,Supported MP3 File Formats MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64, 24, 22.05, 16 Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24,The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- 16, 8sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3extension may cause playback problems. The radio is ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album titledesigned to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is notnot play the file. supported by the radios.
    • 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPlaylist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommendedsupported. to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” optionPlayback of MP3 Files before writing to the disc.When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, theradio checks all files on the medium. If the medium Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Modecontains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, whichtime to start playing the MP3 files. allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’sLoading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected audio system to amplify the source and play through theby the following: vehicle speakers.• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to CD-R media auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the to load than non-multisession discs device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is• Number of files and folders - Loading times will not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX increase with more files and folders audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)Press this button to change the display to time of day. Thetime of day will display for five seconds (when ignition isOFF).MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO(SALES CODE RES+RSC)NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right 4side of the radio faceplate. Media Center 130 (RES/RSC) Operating Instructions — Radio Mode NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
    • 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPower Switch/Volume Control (Rotary) Voice Command System (Radio) — If EquippedPush the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Fea-radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second tures Of Your Vehicle”.time to turn off the radio. Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — IfElectronic Volume Control EquippedThe electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone featuredegrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.volume and to the left decreases it. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is notWhen the audio system is turned on, the sound will be available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped Withset at the same volume level as last played. Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio screen.SEEK ButtonsPress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equippedlistenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone featureto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio (if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Under-will remain tuned to the new station until you make standing The Features Of Your Vehicle”.another selection. Holding either button will bypassstations without stopping until you release it.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL controlUconnect Phone” message will display on the radio knob to save time change.screen. 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.TIME Button The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press theand radio frequency. SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select 4Clock Setting Procedure SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ procedure, starting at Step 2.SCROLL control knob. INFO Button3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with callSCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Textwill begin to blink. message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
    • 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELRW/FF Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a thirdPressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLLcauses the tuner to search for the next frequency in the control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease thedirection of the arrows. This feature operates in either treble tones.AM or FM frequencies. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourthTUNE Control time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust theto increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. sound level from the right or left side speakers.Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth timePush the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL controlwill display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level betweenthe right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. the front and rear speakers.Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again totime and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Buttonmid-range tones. Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five 16-Digit Characterseconds will allow the program format type to be se- Program Type Displaylected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Jazz JazzMusic Type information. News NewsToggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following Nostalgia Nostalgaformat types: Oldies Oldies 16-Digit Character Personality Persnlty Program Type Display 4 Public Public No program type or Rhythm and Blues R&B None undefined Religious Music Rel Musc Adult Hits Adlt Hit Religious Talk Rel Talk Classical Classicl Rock Rock Classic Rock Cls Rock Soft Soft College College Soft Rock Soft Rck Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B Foreign Language Language Sports Sports Information Inform Talk Talk
    • 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 16-Digit Character TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the Program Type hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set Display Top 40 Top 40 the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL Weather Weather control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knobBy pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon to save time change.is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequencystation with the same selected Music Type name. The AM/FM ButtonMusic Type function only operates when in the FM Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.mode. SET/RND Button — To Set the PushbuttonIf a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Memory(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be When you are receiving a station that you wish toexited and the radio will tune to the preset station. commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the displaySETUP Button window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto thisPressing the SETUP button allows you to select between station and press and release that button. If a button isthe following items: not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow RND button, the station will continue to play but will not you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the be stored into pushbutton memory.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221You may add a second station to each pushbutton by Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD andrepeating the above procedure with this exception: Press MP3 Audio Playthe SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the NOTE:display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and • The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACCSET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM position to operate the radio.and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),pressing the pushbutton twice. recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact 4 discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks andEvery time a preset button is used, a corresponding multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.button number will display. Inserting Compact Disc(s)Buttons 1 - 6 Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CDThese buttons tune the radio to the stations that you label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled intocommit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on thestations). radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more thanDISC/AUX Button 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must bePressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch ejected before a new disc can be loaded.from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
    • 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELIf you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it withinON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.show the track number, and index time in minutes and A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1. NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on CAUTION! convertible or soft-top models (if equipped). • This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs SEEK Button only. The use of other sized discs may damage the Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD player mechanism. CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning • Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the away and jam the player mechanism. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of • The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in loaded. CD and MP3 modes. TIME ButtonEJECT Button - Ejecting a CD Press this button to change the display from a large CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223RW/FF Notes On Playing MP3 FilesPress and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 filebegin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button files, pay attention to the following restrictions.works in a similar manner. Supported Media (Disc Types)AM/FM Button The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio arePress the button to select either AM or FM mode. CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 4SET/RND Button (Random Play Button) Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)Press this button while the CD is playing to activateThe medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660Random Play. This feature plays the selections on theLevel 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.compact disc in random order to provide an interesting When reading discs recorded using formats other thanchange of pace. ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran- mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.domly selected track. The radio uses the following limits for file systems:Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-dom Play. • Maximum number of folder levels: 8 • Maximum number of files: 255
    • 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file writingЉ are most likely multisession discs. The use of names and folder names is limited. For large numbers multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to longer disc loading times. display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten- exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is display.) designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names: not play the file. • Level 1: 12 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to character extension) an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit • Level 2: 31 (including a separator Љ.Љ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files character extension) use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 orMultisession disc formats are supported by the radio. VBR bit rates.Multisession discs may contain combinations of normalCD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).Discs created with an option such as Љkeep disc open after
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 MPEG Specifi- Sampling Fre- Playback of MP3 Files Bit Rate (kbps) When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the cation quency (kHz) 320, 256, 224, radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128, contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more 48, 44.1, 32 time to start playing the MP3 files. Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32 Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected 160, 128, 144, by the following: MPEG-2 Audio 24, 22.05, 16 112, 96, 80, 64, 4 Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than 16, 8 CD-R mediaID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longerare supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not to load than non-multisession discssupported by the radios. • Number of files and folders - Loading times willPlaylist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not increase with more files and folderssupported. To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.
    • 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELLIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press and hold the INFO button again for three secondsPressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to Љelapsed timeЉ display.on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Modeturning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack whichfolder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will allows the user to plug in a portable device such as anbegin playing the files contained in that folder (or the MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’snext folder in sequence if the selection does not contain audio system to amplify the source and play through theplayable files). vehicle speakers.The folder list will time out after five seconds. Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) iary device if the AUX jack is connected.Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and thethe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audioName, and Folder Name (if available). is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If thePress the INFO button once more to return to Љelapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volumetimeЉ priority mode. down.Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds ormore and the radio will display song titles for each file.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-Press this button to change the display to time of day. The come kit that contains general information, includingtime of day will display for five seconds (when the how to setup your on-line listening account. For furtherignition is OFF). information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If .siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.EquippedSatellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast- Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identificationing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to Number (ESN/SID) 4coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Please have the following information available whenRadio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, calling:sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- 1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identificationdren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. Number (ESN/SID).NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has 2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.limited coverage in Alaska. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:System ActivationSirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you ESN/SID Accessmay begin listening immediately to the one year of audio With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-service that is included with the factory-installed satellite tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
    • 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELusing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is Reception Qualityselected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of theSirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number following reasons:display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on • The vehicle is parked in an underground parkingthe radio to exit this screen. structure or under a physical obstacle.Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode • Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in thePress the SAT button until ЉSATЉ appears in the display. A form of short audio mutes.CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radiomode. • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.Satellite AntennaTo ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the • Placing objects over or too close to the antenna canroof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects cause signal blockage.placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimediadecreased performance. Larger luggage items such as (Satellite) Modebikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, withinthe loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN oron or above the antenna. ACC position to operate the radio.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229SEEK Buttons additional three seconds will make the radio display thePress and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to returnchannel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek to normal display).up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will RW/FFremain tuned to the new channel until you make another Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttonsselection. Holding either button will bypass channels causes the tuner to search for the next channel in thewithout stopping until you release it. direction of the arrows.SCAN Button 4 TUNE Control (Rotary)Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwisethe next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCANbutton a second time. MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music TypeINFO Button mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE buttonPressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within fivetion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- seconds will allow the program format type to be se-able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an lected.
    • 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELToggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memorytype. When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channelchannel with the same selected Music Type name. and press and release that button. If a button is notIf a preset button is activated while in the Music Type selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be ton, the channel will continue to play but will not beexited and the radio will tune to the preset channel. stored into pushbutton memory.SETUP Button You may add a second channel to each pushbutton byPressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Pressfollowing items: the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton Sirius subscription. twice.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding This feature allows an iPod௡ or external USB device to bebutton number will display. plugged into the USB port, located in the center console or glove compartment.Buttons 1 - 6These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you iPod௡ control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod௡commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations). and iPhone௡ devices. Some iPod௡ software versions may not fully support the iPod௡ control features. Please visitOperating Instructions - Uconnect™ Phone (If Apple’s website for software updates.Equipped) 4Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in “Understanding The NOTE:Features Of Your Vehicle”. • If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual foriPodா/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED iPod௡ or external USB device support capability.NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/ • Connecting an iPod௡ or consumer electronic audioREL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio plays media, but does not use the iPod௡ /MP3 controliPod௡/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate feature to control the connected device.RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.iPod௡/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped asan option with these radios.
    • 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELConnecting The iPodா Or External USB Device NOTE: The center console will have a position whereUse the connection cable to connect an iPod௡ or external the iPod௡ or consumer electronic audio device cable canUSB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port be routed through without damaging the cable whenwhich is located in the center console or glove compart- closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to bement. routed may be located in the base of the center console on either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is not available in the center console base, route the cable away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the lid to close without damaging the cable. Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s iPod௡/USB/MP3 control system (iPod௡ or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect), the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches, as described below. NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis- Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port charged, it may not communicate with the iPod௡/USB/ MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod௡/USB/ on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and sayMP3 control system may charge it to the required level. ЉUSBЉ or ЉSwitch to USBЉ. Once in the iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode, audio tracks (if available from audioUsing This Feature device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect toUSB port: Play Mode When switched to iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode, the• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound iPod௡ or external USB device automatically starts Play system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio 4 etc.) information on the radio display. faceplate may be used to control the iPod௡ or external• The audio device can be controlled using the radio USB device and display data: buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod௡ contents. • Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or• The audio device battery charges when plugged into previous track. the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific • Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while audio device) playing a track, skips to the next track or press theControlling The iPodா Or External USB Device VR button and say ЉNext TrackЉ.Using Radio Buttons • Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by oneTo get into the iPod௡/USB/MP3 control mode and access click, will jump to the previous track in the list ora connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button press the VR button and say ЉPrevious TrackЉ
    • 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Jump backward in the current track by pressing and to the next screen of data for that track. Once all holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press button long enough will jump to the beginning of will go back to the play mode screen on the radio. the current track. • Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and device mode to repeat the current playing track or holding the FF >> button. press the VR button and say ЉRepeat ONЉ or ЉRepeat OffЉ.• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will jump backward or forward respectively, for five • Press the SCAN button to use iPod௡/USB/MP3 de- seconds. vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the• Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button desired track, when it is playing the track, press the during play mode will jump to the next track in the SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the list, or press the VR button and say ЉNext or Previous << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previ- TrackЉ. ous and next tracks.• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only): the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.) Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod௡ or external USB
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 device, or press the VR button and say ЉShuffle ONЉ or fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast ЉShuffle OffЉ. If the RND icon is showing on the radio scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on display, then the shuffle mode is ON. the radio display may be noticeable.List Or Browse Mode • During all List modes, the iPod௡ displays all lists inDuring Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described “wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at thebelow, will bring up List mode. List mode enables bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwardscrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the (counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.audio device. • In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as 4• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod௡ or in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio external USB device. device or external USB device. • Preset 1 – Playlists • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock- • Preset 2 – Artists wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying • Preset 3 – Albums the track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display, • Preset 4 – Genres press the TUNE control knob to select and start • Preset 5 – Audiobooks playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob • Preset 6 – Podcasts
    • 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Pressing a PRESET button will display the current CAUTION! list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line. • Leaving the iPod௡ or external USB device (or any supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in • To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or same PRESET button again to go back to Play damage the device. Follow the device manufactur- mode. er’s guidelines.• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top • Placing items on the iPod௡ or external USB device, level menu of the iPod௡ or external USB device. Turn or connections to the iPod௡ or external USB device the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will and/or to the connectors. display the next sub-menu list item on the audio device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod௡ or external USB device WARNING! sub-menu levels are available on this system. Do not plug in or remove the iPod௡ or external USB• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is device while driving. Failure to follow this warning another shortcut button to the genre listing on your could result in an accident. audio device.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) 2. After the ЉReadyЉ prompt and the following beep, sayMusic can be streamed from your cellular phone to the ЉSetupЉ, then ЉSelect Audio DevicesЉ.Uconnect™ phone system. 3. Say the name of the audio device or ask theControlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on Next Trackthe radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on theStreaming Audio”. radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track 4Play Mode music on your cellular phone.When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can Previous Trackstart playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button onsome devices require the music to be initiated on the the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to thedevice first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™ previous track music on your cellular phone.phone system. Seven devices can be paired to theUconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected Browseand played. Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the current song that is playing will display info.Selecting Different Audio Device1. Press PHONE button to begin.
    • 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELHARMAN KARDONா Logic7ா HIGH system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in dy-PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND namic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for maxi-SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE mum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifierSURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat surroundYour vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon௡ audio sound processing.system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior Logic7௡ multichannel surround-sound technology deliv-sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and ers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seatingreduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes position This surround effect is available for audio fromproprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliver- any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboarding substantial increases in component and system effi- AUX input; and is activated through the Electronicciency levels. Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge high efficiency Selectable Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronicamplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understandingsupply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture. Your Instrument Panel”.The Harman Kardon௡ audio system offers the ability to Selecting “Surround Sound” through the DSS modeschoose Logic 7 surround sound for any audio source. The activates the Harman Kardon௡ Logic7௡ multichannelGreenEdge high-efficiency speaker designs ensure the surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set auto-matically. Fader control is available in surround modebut should be set to the center position for optimalsurround performance.STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IFEQUIPPEDThe remote sound system controls are located on the rearsurface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to 4access the switches. Remote Sound System Controls The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
    • 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELPressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Playerbetween the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the nextCD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.). track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track, or to theThe left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a beginning of the previous track if it is within one secondpushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand after the current track begins to play.control is different depending on which mode you are in. If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays theThe following describes the left-hand control operation in second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.each mode. The center button on the left side rocker switch has noRadio Operation function for a single-disc CD player. However, when aPressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, thelistenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in thewill “Seek” down for the next listenable station. player.The button located in the center of the left-hand controlwill tune to the next preset station that you have pro-grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflectiveprecautions: coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.surface.2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on inwiping from center to edge. your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from 43. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminateding the disc. by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance doesor anti-static sprays. not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be5. Store the disc in its case after playing. turned down or off during mobile phone operation when6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may becometoo high.
    • 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELCLIMATE CONTROLS Automatic Operation Operation of the system is quite simple.Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)The Automatic Temperature Control system automati- 1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and thecally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger. NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only. 2. Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob. Once the comfort level is selected, the sys- tem will maintain that level automati- cally using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system will automatically make the adjustment. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting Automatic Temperature Control the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the Blower Controlaverage person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary. For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation, turn theNOTE: knob to the AUTO position. In manual• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime mode there are seven blower speeds without affecting automatic operation. that can be individual selected. In off• Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in position the blower will shut off. AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button 4 to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates Manual Operation that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the This system offers a full complement of manual override air conditioning is not necessary. features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic, Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Pre-• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than ferred Automatic. This means the operator can override expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired. insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left). fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance. NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details.
    • 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floorchange airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control Air is directed through the floor outlets with aknob (on the right) to one of the following positions. small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets.• Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument • Mix panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demist outlets. This setting works best inNOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to 4aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat the windshield. This setting is good for maintainingpassengers for maximum airflow to the rear. comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.• Bi-Level • Defrost Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-is a difference in temperature between the upper and shield and side window defrosting.lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.This feature gives improved comfort during sunny butcool conditions.
    • 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL• Air Conditioner Control NOTE: Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK conditioning during manual operation position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled. only. When the air conditioning is • In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may turned on, cool dehumidified air will lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation flow through the outlets selected with mode is not allowed in the floor, defrost, or defrost/ the Mode control dial. Press this but- floor mode in order to improve window clearing. ton a second time to turn OFF the air Recirculation will be disabled automatically if theseconditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when modes are selected.manual compressor operation is selected. • Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows• Recirculation Control to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog, The system will automatically control recircu- press the Recirculation button to return to outside air. lation. However, pressing the Recirculation Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured Control button will put the system in recircu- interior air to condense on windows and hamper lation mode. This can be used when outside visibility. For this reason, the system will not allowconditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity Recirculation to be selected while in floor, defrost, orare present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in defrost/floor mode. Attempting to use the recircula-the control button to illuminate. tion while in these modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you Summer Operation can temporarily put the system into Recirculation The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However, must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode, to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene these conditions are present, and the Recirculation glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended. button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper coolant selection. off. This tells you that you are unable to go into 4 Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the Winter Operation system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months move the Mode knob to Panel, Panel/Floor and then is not recommended because it may cause window press the Recirculation button. This feature reduces the fogging. possibility of window fogging. Vacation StorageOperating Tips Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of serviceNOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the airsuggested control settings for various weather condi- conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in thetions. fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.
    • 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANELWindow Fogging Outside Air IntakeInterior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of themoved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. LeavesDefrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if theywindshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win- enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. Indow fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed. winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but slush, and snow.rainy or humid weather. A/C Air FilterNOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen fromlong periods as fogging may occur. entering the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas-Side Window Demisters senger compartment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures”A side window demister outlet is located at each end of in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter servicethe instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct information or see your authorized dealer for service.air toward the side windows when the system is in the Refer to “Maintenance Schedules” for filter serviceFLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at intervals.the area of the windows through which you view theoutside mirrors.
    • UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions 4
    • 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
    • STARTING AND OPERATINGCONTENTSⅥ Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Ⅵ Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 256 Ⅵ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 264 ▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 257 ▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 264 5 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 258 Ⅵ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 269 ▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 270 (Below –20°F Or Ϫ29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 270 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
    • 252 STARTING AND OPERATINGⅥ AutoStick௡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Ⅵ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Ⅵ Sport Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Ⅵ Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 290Ⅵ Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped . . 291Ⅵ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped . . . 292 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) – ManualⅥ Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Transmission Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Ⅵ Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 ▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . 285 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light ▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . 286 And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 ▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 253Ⅵ Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 ▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 313 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 303 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 304 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Ⅵ Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Ⅵ Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Ⅵ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 5 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Ⅵ Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 319 ▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire Ⅵ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 320 And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 ▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 312 ▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 324 ▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
    • 254 STARTING AND OPERATINGⅥ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 336 ▫ 3.6L And 5.7L Engine (With Automatic Ⅵ Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 ▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 ▫ 5.7L Engine (With Manual Transmission) . . . . 329 ▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . 337 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 ▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . 337 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 ▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 330 ▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Ⅵ Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 ▫ Trailer Towing WeightsⅥ Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 342 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 255 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . 350 ▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 351Ⅵ Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 5
    • 256 STARTING AND OPERATINGSTARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! (Continued)Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust theinside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, andpresent, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keylessbelts. Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or WARNING! move the vehicle. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key Manual Transmission – If Equipped fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU- • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle. access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking igni- to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a tion system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is number of reasons. A child or others could be pressed to the floor. seriously or fatally injured. Children should be Normal Starting With Integrated Key – Manual warned not to touch the parking brake, brake Transmission pedal or the shift lever. Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does (Continued) not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and turn the
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 257ignition switch to the START position and release when Automatic Transmission – If Equippedthe engine starts. If the engine fails to start within The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakeswait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” before shifting into any driving gear.procedure. CAUTION! WARNING! Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it ing precautions are not observed: started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic con- • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to verter and once the engine has started, ignite and a complete stop. 5 damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start is at idle speed. can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in into any forward gear when the engine is above “What To Do In Emergencies” for further informa- idle speed. tion. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
    • 258 STARTING AND OPERATINGUsing Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start) Keyless Enter-N-Go – If Equipped This feature allows the driver to oper-NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm ate the ignition switch with the pushengine is obtained without pumping or pressing the of a button, as long as the ENGINEaccelerator pedal. START/STOP button is installed andDo not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans-Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START mitter is in the passenger compart-position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The ment.starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage Installing And Removing The ENGINEautomatically when the engine is running. If the engine START/STOP Buttonfails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the Installing The ButtonLOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the 1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.“Normal Starting” procedure. 2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the ignition switch with the lettering facing up and readable. 3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into position.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 259Removing The Button To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while press-1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed ing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The systemfrom the ignition switch for key fob use. takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically afterchrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry the 10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the enginebutton loose. prior to the engine starting, press the button again.NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button –be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF Manual Transmission Onlyposition. 5 NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warmNormal Starting engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button –Automatic Transmission Only To start the engine, press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm Release the button when the engine starts. If the vehicleengine is obtained without pumping or pressing the fails to start within 15 seconds, release the button, wait 10accelerator pedal.
    • 260 STARTING AND OPERATINGto 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” proce- display a “VEHICLE NOT IN PARK” message and thedure. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out ofto the engine starting, release the button. the PARK position, or it could roll.To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUNSTART/STOP Button – Automatic Transmission (engine not running) position and the transmission is inOnly PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release OFF position.the ENGINE START/STOP button. To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. START/STOP Button – Manual Transmission Only3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ 1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever inSTOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE START/speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine STOP button.will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain inthe ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift 3. Place the shift lever in first gear or Reverse and thenlever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP apply the parking brake.button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 261NOTE: Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions – With Driver’s Foot• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of NEUTRAL Position) inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates similar to an position. ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN and START. To change the ignition switch positions• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the without starting the vehicle and use the accessories system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of follow these steps. inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and the engine is not running. • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position: 5• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”), switch position will remain in the ACC position until • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice to change the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position to the OFF position. (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
    • 262 STARTING AND OPERATING• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time WARNING! (Continued) to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”). • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automaticExtreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or Ϫ29°C) transmission cannot be started this way. UnburnedTo ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of fuel could enter the catalytic converter and oncean externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- the engine has started, ignite and damage theable from your authorized dealer) is recommended. converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-If Engine Fails To Start charged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery WARNING! in another vehicle. This type of start can be dan- gerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Start- • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into ing” in “What to Do In Emergencies” for further the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to information. start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. (Continued)
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 263Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold theSTART/STOP Button) – Automatic Transmission ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 sec-Only onds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch pedal,If the engine fails to start after you have followed the wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold WeatherЉ proce- procedure.dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using Fob Withand hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all Integrated Key)the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the If the engine fails to start after you have followed theENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce-will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push 5disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position andthe “Normal Starting” procedure. release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motorClearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once thisSTART/STOP Button) – Manual Transmission Only occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignitionIf the engine fails to start after you have followed the switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold WeatherЉ proce- repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, pressand hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
    • 264 STARTING AND OPERATING The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one CAUTION! hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec- onds before trying again. WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heaterAfter Starting cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 VoltThe idle speed is controlled automatically and it will electrical cord could cause electrocution.decrease as the engine warms up.ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPEDThe engine block heater warms the engine, and permits Six-Speed Manual Transmissionquicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to astandard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a WARNING!grounded, three-wire extension cord. You or others could be injured if you leave theThe engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on vehicle unattended without having the parkingthe driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,Module. especially on an incline.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 265 NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- CAUTION! creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch warms up. This is normal. pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Start- ing and Operating” for further information.• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor may cause increased shift efforts, and may result 5 in damage to the clutch and transmission.• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while driving, as this may result in transmission syn- chronizer damage.• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Dam- Manual Shifter age to the transmission may occur.
    • 266 STARTING AND OPERATINGShifting The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third andFully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever intoaccelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in theclutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from firstto the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not to fourth or from sixth to third gear.fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the acceleratorpedal when shifting. CAUTION!The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that Always make sure the vehicle comes to a completecenters the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do sospring helps you know which gear you are in when you may result in transmission damage.are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to secondor downshifting from sixth to fifth. You must always use first gear (or Reverse) when starting from a standing position.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 267Recommended Shift Speeds NOTE:To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel • Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverseeconomy, it should be upshifted as listed in recom- inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater thanmended shift speed chart. 3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help MANUAL TRANSMISSION prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS stop, you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN Axle 1-4 4-5 5-6 position for Keyless Enter-N-Go), as compared to the Ratio ignition LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless mph 20 25 42 3.73 Enter-N-Go). This is normal operation of the transmis- 5 (km/h) (32) (40) (67) sion reverse inhibitor system. mph 20 37 48 • Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain, 3.91 (km/h) (32) (59) (77) you may hear your transmission. This can be mostEarlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL withsteady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy. the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM. Also,Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired this may be more noticeable when the transmission isacceleration rate. warm. This is a normal condition and is not an indica- tion of a problem with your clutch or transmission.
    • 268 STARTING AND OPERATING1–4 Skip Shift DownshiftingThere are times when you must shift the transmission To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down-directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steepgear to second gear. This is to help you get the best grade.possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurswhen the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F WARNING!(41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h) Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. Youin first gear, and the accelerator is at 1/4 throttle or less. could have a collision.The “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” will be displayedduring these times. CAUTION!When the “1–4 Skip Shift Indicator Message” is dis-played, the shift mechanism will only allow shifts from • If you skip more than one gear while downshift-first gear to fourth gear. After you shift the transmission ing or downshift at too high an engine speed, youto fourth gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.another forward gear. • Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could damage the engine and/or clutch.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 269AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! CAUTION! • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow- you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is ing precautions are not observed: running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, a complete stop. and turn the engine OFF. When the ignition is in • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the the OFF position, the shift lever is locked in vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted 5 is at idle speed. movement. Furthermore, you should never leave • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU- unattended children inside a vehicle. TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. (Continued) • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal whileshifting out of PARK.
    • 270 STARTING AND OPERATING Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System WARNING! (Continued) This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK Interlock (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than position unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing on lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate be turned to the ON/RUN or START position (engine quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. control of the vehicle and hit someone or some- thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is Five-Speed Automatic Transmission idling normally and when your foot is firmly The shift lever position display (located in the instrument pressing on the brake pedal. panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out ofKey Ignition Park Interlock the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission ShiftThis vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter- Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shiftlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver The electronically-controlled transmission provides aavoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics arethe transmission in PARK. This system also locks the shift self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a newlever in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the OFFposition.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 271vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normalcondition, and precision shifts will develop within a fewhundred miles (kilometers).Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should bedone only after the accelerator pedal is released and thevehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brakepedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual down- 5shifts can be made using the “AutoStick௡” shift control(refer to “AutoStick௡” in this section). Moving the shiftlever to the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position Shift Leverwill manually select the transmission gear, and will Gear Rangesdisplay that gear in the instrument cluster as 4, 3, 2, 1. DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
    • 272 STARTING AND OPERATINGNever attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion. WARNING! (Continued)Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and othersWhen parking on a level surface, you may place the shift if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying tolever in the PARK position first, and then apply the move the shift lever rearward (with the brakeparking brake. pedal released), after you have placed it in PARK.When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before Make sure the transmission is in PARK beforeplacing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the leaving the vehicle.transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to • It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARKmove the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau- or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher thantion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing ongrade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose WARNING! control of the vehicle and hit someone or some- thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for idling normally and when your foot is firmly the parking brake. Always apply the parking pressing on the brake pedal. brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. (Continued) (Continued)
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the number of reasons. A child or others could be parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, seriously or fatally injured. Children should be and turn the engine off. When the ignition is in the warned not to touch the parking brake, brake OFF position, the shift lever is locked in the pedal or the shift lever. PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and 5 movement. do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win- fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued)
    • 274 STARTING AND OPERATING REVERSE CAUTION! This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF stop. position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift NEUTRAL lever could result. Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from periods with the engine running. The engine may be PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the this can damage the drivetrain. transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.The following indicators should be used to ensure that WARNING!you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated. practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that vehicle and have a collision. it indicates the PARK position.• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 275 When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as CAUTION! when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result while towing heavy trailers), use the “AutoStick௡” mode in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recre- (refer to “AutoStick௡” in this section) to select a lower ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In improve performance and extend transmission life by Emergencies” for further information. reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. Transmission Limp Home ModeDRIVE Transmission function is monitored electronically for 5This range should be used for most city and highway abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that coulddriving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down- result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Homeshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remainsautomatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission willgear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving remain in second gear regardless of which forward gearcharacteristics under all normal operating conditions.
    • 276 STARTING AND OPERATINGis selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will con- NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-tinue to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to mend that you visit your authorized dealer at yourbe driven to an authorized dealer for service without earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer hasdamaging the transmission. diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.In the event of a momentary problem, the transmissioncan be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealerfollowing steps: service is required.1. Stop the vehicle. Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically2. Shift the transmission into PARK. controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will3. Turn the engine OFF. automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow- ing conditions are present:4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. • the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,5. Restart the engine. • vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is nolonger detected, the transmission will return to normal • the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.operation.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 277AUTOSTICKா the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) isAutoStick௡ is a driver-interactive transmission feature manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever, orthat offers manual gear shifting to provide you with more the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine luggingcontrol of the vehicle. AutoStick௡ allows you to maximize or overspeed condition would result. It will remain in theengine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. sen, except as described below.This system can also provide you with more control • An “UPSHIFT” message will appear in the Electronicduring passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the in-mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other situa- strument cluster when using AutoStick௡, to alert thetions. driver to upshift to the next gear. The “UPSHIFT” 5Operation message will appear when approaching the maximumWhen the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the engine speed.transmission will operate automatically, shifting between • If AutoStick௡ is engaged while in DRIVE mode, thethe five available gears. To engage AutoStick௡, simply transmission will automatically shift up when maxi-move the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the mum engine speed is reached.DRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. When • If AutoStick௡ is engaged while in SPORT mode, theAutoStick௡ is active, the current transmission gear is transmission will remain in the selected gear evendisplayed in the instrument cluster. In AutoStick௡ mode,
    • 278 STARTING AND OPERATING when maximum engine speed is reached. The trans- • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when mission will upshift only when commanded by the AutoStick௡ is engaged. driver. To disengage AutoStick௡ mode, hold the shift lever to the• The transmission will automatically downshift as the right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped) vehicle slows down (to prevent engine lugging) and until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument will display the current gear. cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick௡ mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator• The transmission will automatically downshift to first pedal. gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the WARNING! vehicle is accelerated. Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a• You can start out in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their a stop) will allow starting in second gear. Starting out grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions. personal injury.• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed. SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick௡ is en- This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled gaged. dampening system. This system reduces body roll and
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 279pitch in many driving situations including cornering, • Off – This is the initial position. This mode will give aacceleration and braking. In addition, the driver has the sporty, but comfortable ride. Within this mode, theability to select a more aggressive shifting pattern. On the suspension will adapt to the vehicle inputs, includingcenter console, there is a “SPORT” button that when vehicle speed, steering inputs, braking and accelera-pressed will cycle through three different driving modes. tion. The transmission will be optimized for smooth,This is the description of each mode of operation: less aggressive shifting. The system will return to OFF when the ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is selected. • Sport Mode – This mode is selected by the first press of the “SPORT” button. A “SPORT” message will display 5 in the instrument cluster. The system will return to SPORT mode when the ignition switch is cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is selected. This mode will set suspension for maximum performance handling and is intended for spirited driving. • TRACK Mode – This includes SPORT mode and affects automatic transmission shifting in either Auto or SPORT Button Manual mode. Refer to “AutoStick” in “Starting And
    • 280 STARTING AND OPERATING Operating” for further information. In TRACK mode, WARNING! the transmission has a sportier, more aggressive shift pattern. In Manual mode, the transmission will hold Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. gear at redline during manual shifting (console shifter or Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear paddle shifters). A “TRACK” message will display in the wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and instrument cluster. The system will return to SPORT possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and mode when the ignition switch is cycled from RUN to carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction OFF to RUN, if this mode is selected. (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).NOTE: For manual transmission vehicles, the available Tractiondriving modes are Sport on or Sport Off. Track is not When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for aavailable. wedge of water to build up between the tire and roadDRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stoppingAcceleration ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip- tions should be observed:pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pullerratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads arewhen there is a difference in the surface traction under slushy.the rear (driving) wheels.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 2812. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. Flowing/Rising Water3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become WARNING!visible. Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where4. Keep tires properly inflated. water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and Flowing water can wear away the road or path’sthe vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeperstop. water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow thisYour vehicle is equipped with a Limited Slip Differential warning may result in injuries that are serious or 5(LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing WaterDriving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving throughcentimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Cautionsafety and prevent damage to your vehicle. and Warning before doing so.
    • 282 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)• Always check the depth of the standing water • Driving through standing water may cause dam- before driving through it. Never drive through age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al- standing water that is deeper than the bottom of ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination• Determine the condition of the road or the path (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) that is under water, and if there are any obstacles after driving through standing water. Do not con- in the way, before driving through the standing tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears water. contaminated, as this may result in further dam- age. Such damage is not covered by the New• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving Vehicle Limited Warranty. through standing water. This will minimize wave • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can effects. cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious (Continued) internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 283 POWER STEERING WARNING! Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- steering system that will give you good vehicle response cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- while parking and good feel while driving. If the electro- cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop- hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that ping distances. Therefore, after driving through prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on system will provide mechanical steering capability. the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. 5• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can CAUTION! cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electri- stranded. cally driven pump to reduce or stop power steering• Failure to follow these warnings may result in assistance in order to prevent damage to the system. injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your Normal operation will resume once the system is passengers, and others around you. allowed to cool.
    • 284 STARTING AND OPERATING If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” NOTE: message and a flashing icon are displayed on • Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera- the EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is these conditions there will be a substantial increase inlikely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speedsto “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in and during parking maneuvers.“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer forformation. service.If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” mes-sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it PARKING BRAKEindicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parkingoccurred, which caused an over temperature condition in brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in thethe power steering system. You will lose power steering PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position.assistance momentarily until the over temperature con- When the parking brake is applied and the ignitiondition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keylessthen pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments Enter-N-Go), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru-until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle ment cluster will illuminate.Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding YourInstrument Panel” for further information.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 285NOTE: Manual Transmission – If Equipped• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis- The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle. to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.• This light only shows that the parking brake is ap- plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front 5wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and awayfrom the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equippedwith an automatic transmission, apply the parking brakebefore placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the loadon the transmission locking mechanism may make itdifficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parkingbrake should always be applied whenever the driver is Parking Brake Releasenot in the vehicle.
    • 286 STARTING AND OPERATINGAutomatic Transmission – If Equipped WARNING!The foot operated parking brake is located below the lowerleft corner of the instrument panel. To apply the park brake, • Never use the PARK position as a substitute forfirmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the the parking brake. Always apply the parkingparking brake, press the park brake pedal a second time and brake fully when parked to guard against vehiclelet your foot up as you feel the brake disengage. movement and possible injury or damage. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. (Continued) Parking Brake
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 287 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless parking brake released, a brake system malfunction Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an could operate power windows, other controls, or authorized dealer immediately. move the vehicle.• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged BRAKE SYSTEM before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic failure and a collision. 5 brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav- systems loses normal capability, the remaining ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage system will still function. There will be some or injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident in PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to by increased pedal travel during application, greater roll and cause damage or injury. pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”
    • 288 STARTING AND OPERATINGIn the event power assist is lost for any reason (for related motor noises. These noises are the system per-example, repeated brake applications with the engine forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS systemOFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to is working properly. This self check occurs each time thebrake the vehicle will be much greater than that required vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).with the power system operating. ABS is activated during braking under certain road orAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loosevehicle stability and brake performance under most debris, or panic stops.braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps” You also may experience the following when the brakethe brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent system goes into anti-lock:wheel lock-up. • The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for aThe Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents short time after the stop),the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greatercontrol of available braking forces applied to the rear • The clicking sound of solenoid valves,axle. • Brake pedal pulsations, and a slight drop or fall awayWhen the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 289 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains so- • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent phisticated electronic equipment that may be sus- the natural laws of physics from acting on the ceptible to interference caused by improperly in- vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering stalled or high output radio transmitting efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition equipment. This interference can cause possible of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of afforded. such equipment should be performed by qualified • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent professionals. collisions, including those resulting from exces- 5• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish sive speed in turns, following another vehicle too their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. closely, or hydroplaning. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just • The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System press firmly on your brake pedal when you need (ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited to slow down or stop. in a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. (Continued) All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.
    • 290 STARTING AND OPERATINGAnti-Lock Brake Warning Light If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system islight will come on when the ignition switch is turned to required.the ON position and may stay on for as long as fourseconds. ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronicIf the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. Thiswhile driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), thebrake system is not functioning and that service is TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assistrequired. However, the conventional brake system will System), and the ESC (Electronic Stability Control). Thesecontinue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning systems work together to enhance both vehicle stabilityLight” is not on. and control in various driving conditions.If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system An additional electronic brake control feature called Hillshould be serviced as soon as possible to restore the Start Assist (HSA) is standard on manual transmissionbenefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light” models.does not come on when the ignition switch is turned tothe ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon aspossible.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 291Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) – If Equipped Traction Control System (TCS) – If EquippedThis system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of eachunder adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau- driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure islic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power isavoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and A feature of the TCS system functions similar to aOperating” for further information. limited-slip differential (LSD) and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is WARNING! spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine 5 from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “ESC (Electronic Stability from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery Control)” in this section for more information. surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS- equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
    • 292 STARTING AND OPERATINGBrake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped WARNING!This system complements the ABS by optimizing thevehicle braking capability during emergency braking The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physicsmaneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase thesituation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appli- traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. Thecation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those re-This can help reduce braking distances. sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capa-Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS bilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never beassistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner thatmust apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety ofstopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure others.unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedalis released, the BAS is deactivated. Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission Only The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 293brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle WARNING!during this short period of time, the system will releasebrake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less thansystem will release brake pressure in proportion to 8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in when the system will not activate and slight rollingthe intended direction of travel. may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver isHSA Activation Criteria responsible for braking the vehicle.The following criteria must be met in order for HSA toactivate: Disabling/Enabling HSA 5• Vehicle must be stopped. If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the• Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un- vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa- ing uphill is in REVERSE gear). tion.
    • 294 STARTING AND OPERATINGFor vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the 8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then anfollowing steps: additional half-turn to the right.NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within 9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then90 seconds. back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is dis-straight forward). abled.2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature3. Apply the parking brake. to it’s previous setting.4. Start the engine. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) – If Equipped This system enhances directional control and stability of5. Release the clutch pedal. the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left. corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting theswitch bank below the climate controls) four times within condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator maintain the desired path.Light” should turn on and turn off two times.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 295The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path WARNING!that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and comparesit to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot pre-does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the vent the natural laws of physics from acting on thebrake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded bythe condition of oversteer or understeer. prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci- dents, including those resulting from excessive speed• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro- appropriate for the steering wheel position. planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate 5 appropriate for the steering wheel position. driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa- bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
    • 296 STARTING AND OPERATINGESC Operating Modes The “ESC Off” switch is located in the switch bank nearThe ESC system has two available operating modes: the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off”ESC On switch and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction IndicatorThis is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC ON again, mo-ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESCmode. This mode should be used for most driving Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn off.situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF forspecific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,Partial Off sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to theThe “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESCmore spirited driving experience is desired. It is also Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momen-mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the tarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be donethreshold for ESC activation, which allows for more while the vehicle is in motion.wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 297 light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the WARNING! vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion of ESC, speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho- except for the limited wheel spin feature described in rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off diagnosed and corrected. Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stabil- The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- ity features of ESC function normally. When in cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as “Partial Off” mode, the enhanced vehicle stability the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. offered by the ESC system is reduced. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/ 5ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-ESC OFF Indicator Light celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions. when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine NOTE:running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
    • 298 STARTING AND OPERATING• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system Synchronizing ESC will be ON even if it was turned off previously. If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the “ESC• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop illuminate with the engine running. If this when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the that caused the ESC activation. left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/ The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 299TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE: • P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.Tire Markings design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 5 • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo- rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex- ample: T145/80D18 103M.1 — U.S. DOT Safety Stan- 4 — Maximum Loaddards Code (TIN)2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure CAUTION!3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades Do not use two different size tires on the rear wheels, as this can result in rear axle damage.
    • 300 STARTING AND OPERATINGTire Sizing Chart TIRE SIZING TERMSSize Designation: P = Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards ؆....blank....؆ = Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards T or S = Temporary compact spare tire 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) — Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code — ЉRЉ means radial construction — ЉDЉ means diagonal or bias construction 15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 301 TIRE SIZING TERMSService Description: 95 = Load Index — A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol — A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions — The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) 5Load Identification: ؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire Light Load (LL) = Light load tire C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressureMaximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carryMaximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure forthis tire
    • 302 STARTING AND OPERATINGTire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewallThe TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found onhowever, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboardwith white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBEREXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301DOT = Department of Transportation — This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway useMA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —03 means the 3rd week.01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) —01 means the year 2001 — Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 303Tire Terminology and Definitions Term DefinitionB-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold 5 tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pres- sure is molded into the sidewall.Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres- Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressuresure as shown on the tire placard.Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
    • 304 STARTING AND OPERATINGTire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information PlacardTire and Loading Information Placard LocationNOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listedon the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of thedriver’s side door. Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2) total weight your vehicle can carry 3) tire size designed for your vehicle 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 305Loading combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage andThe vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceedthe load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You the weight referenced here.will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limitadhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tireinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”of this manual. on your vehicle’s placard.NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver andgross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 5axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.“Vehicle Loading” in this section. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount ofTo determine the maximum loading conditions of your cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be fiveoccupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount oflbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
    • 306 STARTING AND OPERATINGavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs NOTE:(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • The following table shows examples on how to calcu-[295 kg]). late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and number and size of occupants. This table is forbeing loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely illustration purposes only and may not be accurate forexceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.calculated in Step 4. • For the following example, the combined weight of6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbstrailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this (392 kg).manual to determine how this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 307 5
    • 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Safety WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING! can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the cause collisions. recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re- overload them. sult in over-heating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushionTIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes canTire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affectsatisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resultingareas are affected by improper tire pressure: in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob- lems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued)
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 309 Tire Inflation Pressures WARNING! (Continued) The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve- driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to door. the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure mended cold tire inflation pressure. information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-Economy ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire PressureImproper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information” section of this manual. 5patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well aswear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at leastearlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge totire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgementconsumption. when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may lookRide Comfort and Vehicle Stability properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortableride.
    • 310 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per CAUTION! 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent the winter. moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the which could damage the valve stem. outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has notbeen driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressureinflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Tire Pressures For High Speed OperationCheck tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speedsof outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-temperature changes. tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 311loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tirestion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tiredealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading WARNING!and cold tire inflation pressures. Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires WARNING! on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al- High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your combine them with other types of tires. tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in 5 maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your 75 mph (120 km/h). authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire and Wheel – If Equipped Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
    • 312 STARTING AND OPERATINGvehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an Compact Spare Tire – If Equippedauthorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.pattern. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description onIf your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip- the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on thement tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo- driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped 80D18 103M.with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not T, S = Temporary Spare Tireinstall more than one non-matching temporary use spare Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time. ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. CAUTION! Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire and installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. wheel on the vehicle at any given time
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 313 your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the WARNING! original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the Compact spares are for temporary emergency use first opportunity. only. With these spares, do not drive more than Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare 5 tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same asFull Size Spare – If Equipped your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) theThe full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at theThis tire may look like the original equipped tire on the first opportunity.front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This sparetire may have limited tread life. When the tread is wornto the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full sizespare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
    • 314 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! WARNING! Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In- Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener- stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam- handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some- speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu- your Tire and Loading Information Placard located ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair) a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could Tread Wear Indicators result in loss of vehicle control. Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should beTire Spinning replaced.When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do notspin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do InEmergencies” for further information.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style • Tire pressure • Distance driven WARNING! 5 Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to1 — Worn Tire follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.2 — New Tire You could lose control and have a collision resultingThese indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread in serious injury or death.grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depthbecomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as littletread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
    • 316 STARTING AND OPERATINGReplacement Tires WARNING!The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of manycharacteristics. They should be inspected regularly for • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other thanwear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- that specified for your vehicle. Some combinationsfacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-lent to the originals in size, quality and performance pension dimensions and performance characteris-when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-Information” placard for the size designation of your tire. able handling and stress to steering and suspen-The service description and load identification will be sion components. You could lose control and havefound on the original equipment tire. Failure to use a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Useequivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratingssafety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend approved for your vehicle.that you contact your original equipment or an autho- • Never use a tire with a smaller load index orrized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire capacity, other than what was originally equippedspecifications or capability. on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. (Continued)
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire following precautions: failure and loss of vehicle control. • Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important CAUTION! that only chains in good condition are used. Bro- ken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could result in false speedometer and odometer readings. indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged 5 parts of the chain before further use.TIRE CHAINS • Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly asUse only compact chains or other traction aids that meet possible and then retighten after driving aboutSAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the 1⁄2 mile (0.8 km).proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).manufacturer. Install tire chains only on P215/65R17 • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and largeusing standard chains, on P225/60R18 and P235/55R18 bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.using model 0143 (tirechaindealer.com) and on P235/55R19 using model Z-575 (scc-chain.com). • Use on rear wheels only.NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire. (Continued)
    • 318 STARTING AND OPERATING SNOW TIRES CAUTION! (Continued) Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires • Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement. during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the • Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions M+S designation on the tire sidewall. on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the lower If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and suggested operating speed of the chain manufac- type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only turer if different from the speed recommended by in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the the manufacture. safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than whatNOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and was originally equipped with your vehicle and shouldyour vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mphpavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instruc- (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer totions on method of installation, operating speed, and original equipment or an authorized tire dealer forconditions for usage. recommended safe operating speeds, loading and coldAlways use the lower suggested operating speed if both tire inflation pressures.the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug- While studded tires improve performance on ice, skidgest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may betraction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 319poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear shouldhibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be be corrected prior to rotation being performed.checked before using these tire types. The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross”TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS shown in the following diagram.Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate atdifferent loads and perform different steering, handling,and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear atunequal rates.These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. 5The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile withaggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Roadtype tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to main-tain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute toa smooth, quiet ride.Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte-nance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if Tire Rotation
    • 320 STARTING AND OPERATINGTIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure ifThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warningdriver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effectsmended cold placard pressure. and natural pressure loss through the tire.The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turnwhen the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommendedwill decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least minates, you must increase the tire pressure to thethree hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a recommended cold placard pressure in order for thethree hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must “TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will auto-not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into matically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turnthe tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutesproperly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receivealso increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and this information.there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-sure.
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 321For example, your vehicle may have a recommended CAUTION!cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressureof 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F • The TPMS has been optimized for the original(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures anda temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire warning have been established for the tire sizepressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM eration or sensor damage may result when usingTelltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can causepressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a 5“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres- • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,sure value. always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
    • 322 STARTING AND OPERATINGNOTE: • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure the tire. or condition. Base System• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless while adjusting your tire pressure. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. readings to the receiver module. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the stopping ability. tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte- nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain The TPMS consists of the following components: correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure • Receiver module, gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale • Four TPM sensors, and Light.” • TPM Telltale Light
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 323Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings system fault still exists. The “TPM Telltale Light” will The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE” message will be system fault can occur due to any of the following: displayed and a chime will sound when tire pres- 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or drivingsure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies asShould this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, the TPM sensors.check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that containsplacard pressure value. Once the system receives the materials that may block radio wave signals.updated tire pressures, the system will automatically 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or 5update and the “TPM Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” wheel housings.message will turn off. The vehicle may need to be drivenfor up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.the TPMS to receive this information. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.Service TPMS Warning Vehicles With Compact SpareIf a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” willflash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in theswitch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the compact spare tire.
    • 324 STARTING AND OPERATING2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” message will turn OFF,tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressurelimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will warning limit in any of the four active road tires. Thesound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn ON and a vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above“LOW TIRE” message will be displayed for a minimum 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive thisof five seconds. information.3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above Premium System – If Equipped15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wirelessand off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressuresound and the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off readings to the receiver module.for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthlyreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, and to maintain the proper pressure.the TPMS will update automatically and the “TPM
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 325The TPMS consists of the following components:• Receiver module,• Four TPM sensors,• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec- tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and• TPM Telltale LightTire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the 5 instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possibleactive road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition“LOW TIRE” message and a graphic showing the pres- (those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’ssure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values recommended cold placard pressure inflation value.flashing. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the “TPM Telltale Light”
    • 326 STARTING AND OPERATINGwill turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for theTPMS to receive this information.Service TPMS WarningIf a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” willflash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, theEVIC will display a ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ messagefor a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensoris not being received. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
    • STARTING AND OPERATING 3271. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving position. The system still needs to be serviced as long asnext to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ message is displayed.the TPM sensors. Vehicles With Compact Spare2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.materials that may block radio wave signals. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or compact spare tire.wheel housings. 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “TPM 55. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will sound. InThe EVIC will also display a ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display amessage for a minimum of five seconds when a system flashing pressure value.fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes abovedetected. In this case, the ЉSERVICE TPM SYSTEMЉ 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash onmessage is then followed wit